kia, the company - Dealer E Process

kia, the company

Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. It will

give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of a

Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your

vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”, “Who is Kia?”, “What

does ‘Kia’ mean?”.

Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea.

It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building

high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.

The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to the

world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a,

means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to come

up out of Asia to the world.”

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your dealer knowsyour vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts andis dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models.

Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along withthe various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your par-ticular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2007 Kia Motors Corp.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by anyinformation storage and retrieval system or translation inwhole or part is not permitted without written authorizationfrom Kia Motors Corporation.

Printed in Korea

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Knowing your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

Driving tips

In case of an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications

Index

table of contents

1

How to use this manual / 1-2

Vehicle handling instructions / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-3

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. At thevery least, you must read the WARNINGand CAUTION sections spread through-out the manual, which are easily recog-nized by their special markings. Thesesections have precautions that must befollowed to prevent personal injury ordeath.

Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, youlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. A goodplace to start is the index; it has an alpha-betical listing of all information in yourmanual.

Sections: This manual has eight sectionsplus an index. Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-al. These WARNING’s, CAUTION’s andNOTICE’s were prepared to enhanceyour personal safety and continued satis-faction with Kia vehicle. You should care-fully read and follow ALL procedures andrecommendations provided in theseWARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates a situation inwhich damage to your vehicle couldresult if the notice is ignored.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious bodily injury or deathcould result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich personal injury, perhapssevere, could result if the caution isignored.

1 3

Introduction

VEHICLE HANDLINGINSTRUCTIONSAs with other vehicles of this type, failureto operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control, an accident orvehicle rollover. Specific design charac-teristics (higher ground clearance, track,etc.) give this vehicle a higher center ofgravity than ordinary cars. They are notdesigned for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional 2-wheel drivevehicles. Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers. Again, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss ofcontrol, an accident or vehicle rollover.Be sure to read the “on-pavement’’and “off-road’’ driving guidelines,Section 5 in this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSNo special break-in period is needed. Byfollowing a few simple precautions for thefirst 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add tothe performance, economy and life ofyour vehicle.• Do not race the engine.• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.

• Avoid full-throttle starts.

2

Instrument panel overview / 2-2

Engine compartment / 2-3



22

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OBL006001N

1. Light control / Turn signals................4-51

2. Instrument cluster .............................4-36

3. Wiper/Washer ...................................4-54

4. Climate control system*............4-59/4-66

5. Audio* ...............................................3-98

6. Passenger’s Air Bag* ........................3-51

7. Hazard ..............................................4-58

8. Hood release lever............................3-69

9. Driver’s Air Bag*................................3-50

10. Steering wheel ................................4-25

11. Ignition switch ...................................4-2

12. Parking brake lever .........................4-21

13. Shift lever ..........................................4-5

14. Glove box........................................3-85

* : if equipped

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

2 3


ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OBL086001N

1. Air cleaner.........................................7-19

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-11

3. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-11

4. Auto transmission fluid dipstick* .......7-16

5. Brake / clutch* fluid reservoir............7-14

6. Fuse box .............................................6-7

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-18

8. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-15

9. Radiator cap .....................................7-13

10. Engine coolant reservoir .................7-12

11. Battery ......................................6-4/7-22

* : if equipped

1 43 5 62

7 8 9 1110

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Keys / 3-2Remote keyless entry / 3-3Immobilizer system / 3-5Door locks / 3-7Window / 3-13Seat / 3-15Safety belts / 3-25

Air bags - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-47

Hood / 3-69Fuel filler lid / 3-71Auto fuel cutoff switch / 3-74Mirrors / 3-74Homelink® wireless control system / 3-78Interior lights / 3-82Storage compartment / 3-83Interior features / 3-86Sunroof / 3-91Luggage net / 3-94Tonneau cover / 3-95Luggage center box / 3-96Roof rack / 3-96Antenna / 3-98Audio remote control / 3-99Audio system / 3-100

Knowing your vehicle 3


23

The key code number is stamped on theplate attached to the key set. Should youlose your keys, this number will enablean authorized Kia Dealer to duplicate thekeys easily. Remove the plate and store itin a safe place. Also, record the codenumber and keep it in a safe and handyplace, but not in the vehicle.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition keyLeaving children unattended in avehicle with the ignition key is dan-gerous even if the key is not in theignition. Children copy adults andthey could place the key in the igni-tion. The ignition key would enablechildren to operate power windowsor other controls, or even make thevehicle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or even death.Never leave the keys in your vehiclewith unsupervised children.

OMG035108N

CAUTIONUse only Kia original parts for theignition key in your vehicle. If anaftermarket key is used, the ignitionswitch may not return to ON afterSTART. If this happens, the starterwill continue to operate causingdamage to the starter motor andpossible fire due to excessive cur-rent in the wiring.

3 3


(1) Lock button(2) Unlock button(3) Rear hatch window unlock button(4) Alarm button

(1) Lock ( )All doors are locked if the lock buttonis pressed.

(2) Unlock ( ) Driver’s door is unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed once. All doors areunlocked if the unlock button ispressed twice within 4 seconds.After pressing this button, the doorswill be locked automatically unlessyou open them within 30 seconds.

(3) Rear hatch window unlock ( ) If you depress (more than 0.5 sec-ond) the corresponding button on thetransmitter, the rear hatch window willunlock.

(4) Alarm ( ) The horn sounds and hazard warninglights will flash for about 27 secondsif this button is pressed (more than0.5 second). To stop the horn andlights, press any button on the trans-mitter.

✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:• The ignition key is in ignition switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Kia Dealer.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OUN026001

➀ ➁ ➂

➃

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the keylessentry system is inoperative due toexposure to water or liquids, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er vehicle warranty.


43

Operational distance may vary depend-ing upon the area the transmitter is usedin. For example, if the vehicle is parkednear police stations, government andpublic offices, broadcasting stations, mil-itary installations, airports, or transmit-ting towers, etc., operational distancemay be lessened.

This device complies with Industrycanada standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence including interference that maycause undesired operation of the vehi-cle.

Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centercover.

2. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, make surethe battery positive “+” symbol facesdown as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

✽ NOTICEThe keyless entry system transmitter isdesigned to give you years of troublefreeuse, however it can malfunction ifexposed to moisture or static electricity.If you are unsure how to use your trans-mitter or replace the battery, contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-ming.

✽ NOTICE• Using the wrong battery can cause the

transmitter to malfunction. Be sure touse the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it toheat or sunlight.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

OUN026002

OUN026003

3 5


Your vehicle is equipped with an electron-ic engine immobilizer system to reducethe risk of unauthorized vehicle use.Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition key,and antenna coil in the key cylinder andImmobilizer Control Unit (or SmartraUnit).With this system, whenever you insertyour ignition key into the ignition switchand turn it to ON, the antenna coil in theignition switch receives a signal from thetransponder in the ignition key and thensends the signal to the ECU (EngineControl Unit).The ECU checks the signal whether theignition key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep eachkey separately not to have any malfunc-tion after you receive your new vehicle.

Limp home (override) procedureWhen you turn the ignition key to the ONposition, if the IMMO indicator goes offafter blinking 5 times, your transponderequipped in the ignition key is out of order.You cannot start the engine without thelime home procedure. To start the engine,you have to input your password by usingthe ignition switch.The following procedure is how to inputyour password of “2345” as an example.1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The IMMO indicator ( ) will blink 5times and go off indicating the begin-ning of the limp home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC posi-tion.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example“2”), turn the ignition key to the ON andACC position twice. Perform the sameprocedure for the next digits between 3seconds and 10 seconds (for example,for “3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC 3times).

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION Do not put metal accessories nearthe key or ignition switch.The engine may not start for themetal accessories may interrupt thetransponder signal from normallytransmitting.

WARNINGIn order to prevent theft of yourvehicle, do not leave spare keysanywhere in your vehicle. YourImmobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password and shouldbe kept confidential. Do not leavethis number anywhere in your vehi-cle.


63

4. If all of the digits have been input suc-cessfully, you have to start the enginewithin 30 seconds. If you attempt tostart the engine after 30 seconds, theengine will not start and you will haveto input your password again.

After performing the limp home proce-dure, you have to see an authorized Kiadealer immediately to inspect and repairyour ignition key or immobilizer system.

✽ NOTICEIf you cannot start your engine in spiteof limp home procedure, have your vehi-cle towed by an authorized Kia dealerfor inspection and necessary repairs.

✽ NOTICEThe transponder in your ignition key isan important part of the immobilizersystem. It is designed to give years oftroublefree service, however you shouldavoid exposure to moisture, static elec-tricity and rough handling.Immobilizer system malfunction couldoccur.

✽ NOTICEDo not change, alter or adjust the immo-bilizer system because it could cause theimmobilizer system to malfunction andshould only be serviced by an autho-rized Kia dealer. Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe immobilizer system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.

3 7


Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to

unlock and toward front of vehicle tolock.

• Turn the key toward front of vehicle tolock all doors.

• Turn the key to the right once to unlockthe driver’s door and to the right twicewithin 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (ifequipped)

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key (ifequipped).

• Once the doors are unlocked, it may beopened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the doorby hand. Make sure that doors areclosed securely.

✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-ly due to freezing conditions.

To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock switch (➀) to the “LOCK”position and close the door (➁).

✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key, engagethe parking brake, close all windowsand lock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

DOOR LOCKS

E2BLA302

LOCK UNLOCK

6BLA304

➀

➁


83

✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

Operating door locks from insidethe vehicleWith the door lock button• To unlock a door, pull the door lock but-

ton to the “Unlock” position (the redpart (➁) of the button becomes visi-ble).

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (➀) to the “Lock” position. If thedoor is locked, red part (➁) of the knobis not visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(➂).

• If the inner door handle of driver’s sidedoor is pulled when the door lock but-ton is in lock position, the button isunlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch andif the front door is open.

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

E2BLA305

LOCKUNLOCK

➀➂

➁

3 9


With central door lock switch• When pushing down on the front por-

tion of the switch, all vehicle doors willlock (➀).

• When pushing down on the rear por-tion of the switch, all vehicle doors willunlock (➁).

• However, if the key is in the ignitionswitch and any front door is open, thedoors will not lock when the front por-tion of central door lock switch ispressed.

✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.

OBL036901N

1KMA2008

UNLOCKDriver’s door

Front passenger’s door (if equipped)

LOCK

➀➁


103

Impact sensing door unlock sys-tem (if equipped)All doors will be automatically unlockedwhen the Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) detects a collision whilethe ignition switch is ON.However, the doors may not be unlocked,if electrical power in the vehicle shouldfail.

Rear door child safety lockThe child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the “lock”position. When the child safety lock isin the “lock ( )” position, rear doorwill not open when the inner door han-dle is pulled inside the vehicle.

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

E2BLA306

3 11


3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle.Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle until rear door childsafety lock is unlocked ( ).

Rear hatchOpening the rear hatch • Rear hatch is locked or unlocked with a

key.• To open the rear hatch, insert the key

into the lock, turn it to the unlock posi-tion and pull up the rear hatch bypressing the handle.You can also lock/unlock the latch (butnot release it) with the central door locksystem.

• If unlocked, the rear hatch can beopened by pressing the handle andpulling the hatch up.

• To close the rear hatch, lower andpush down the rear hatch firmly. Makesure that the rear hatch is securelylatched.

✽ NOTICEMake certain that you close the rearhatch/window before driving your vehi-cle. Possible damage may occur to therear hatch/window lift cylinders andattaching hardware if the rearhatch/window is not closed prior to driv-ing.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed.To preventchildren from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear doorsafety locks should be used when-ever children are in the vehicle.

CAUTION - Rear hatchThe rear hatch/window swingsupward. Make sure no objects orpeople are near the rear of the vehi-cle when opening the hatch/win-dow.

E2BLA612A

LOCKUNLOCK

E2BLA330B


123

Opening the rear hatch window(if equipped)To open the rear hatch window, press therear hatch window release button andraise the rear hatch window at the rear ofthe vehicle.

The window will raise completely by itselfafter it has been raised halfway.To close the rear hatch window, lowerand push down the rear hatch windowfirmly. Make sure that the rear hatch win-dow is securely fastened.• If your vehicle is not equipped with a

remote keyless entry, you can alsoopen the rear hatch window by insert-ing the key into the rear hatch keycylinder and turning the key to the righttwice within 3 seconds and raising it.

• If your vehicle is equipped with aremote keyless entry, you can alsoopen the rear hatch window by press-ing the rear hatch window open buttonon the transmitter.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the rear hatch /win-dow open, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injury ordeath to vehicle occupants.If you must drive with the rearhatch/window open, keep the airvents and all windows open so thatadditional outside air comes intothe vehicle.

OBL036903N E2BLB351

3 13


Power windows The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power window switchthat controls that door’s window.However, the driver has a power windowlock switch which can block the operationof passenger windows.The power windows can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after the igni-tion key is removed or turned to the ACCor LOCK position. However, if the frontdoors are opened, the power windowscannot be operated even within the 30seconds after the ignition key removal.

✽ NOTICE• If you notice buffeting and pulsation

(wind shock) with either side windowopen, you should open the oppositewindow slightly to reduce the condi-tion.

• In cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

WINDOWS

CAUTION• To protect the power window sys-

tem from the possibility of dam-age, do not open or close twowindows at the same time. Thiswill also ensure the longevity ofthe fuse.

• Never try to operate the mainswitch on the driver's door andthe individual door windowswitch in opposing directions atthe same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot beopened or closed.

WARNING - Windows• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head andother obstructions are safely outof the way before closing a win-dow.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep thedriver’s door power window lockswitch in the LOCK position(depressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by the child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-side through the window openingwhile driving.


143

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle. To open or close awindow, press down (5) or pull up (5) thefront portion of the corresponding switch.

Automatic power window down (driver’s window)

Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detent posi-tion (6) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up the switch momentarilyto the opposite direction of the windowmovement.

Power window lock switch

• The driver can disable the power win-dow switches on a passenger door bydepressing the power window lockswitch located on the driver’s door toLOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lock switchis ON, the driver’s master controlcannot operate the passenger doorpower windows either.

1KMA2013

1KMB2012N

S2BLA305DPower window lock switch

3 15


Driver’s seat➀ Seat adjustment, forward /

backward➁ Seatback recliner➂ Seat adjustment, height➃ Seat heater switch*➄ Headrest adjustment

Front passenger seat➅ Seat adjustment, forward /

backward ➆ Seatback recliner➇ Seat heater switch*➈ Headrest adjustment

Rear seat➉ Armrest

Headrest adjustmentSplit folding rear seat

* if equipped

SEAT

OBL036016N

11

12


163

(Continued)• In order to avoid unnecessary air

bag injuries including the possi-bility of severe injury or death,always sit as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel so thatyour chest is at least 250 mm (10inches) away from the steeringwheel.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust seat while

the vehicle is moving. This couldresult in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap por-tion of the safety belt snug andlow across the hips. This is thebest position to protect you incase of an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING - Seating posi-tion

In order to avoid unnecessary airbag injuries including the possibili-ty of severe injury or death, alwayssit as far back as possible by mov-ing the seat far back, while stillmaintaining good vehicle control.Serious injury or death may becaused due to the deployment ofthe passenger’s air bag.

3 17


WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If afront seat is reclined during an acci-dent, the occupant’s hips may slideunder the lap portion of the safetybelt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen or neck or apassenger may be ejected in arollover. Serious or fatal internalinjuries could result. The drivermust advise the front passenger tokeep the seatback in a comfortablyupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.

Front seat adjustment (Manual type)Adjusting the seat forward and back-wardTo move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the control knob. If the seat moves,it is not locked properly.

Adjusting the seatback reclinerTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on theoutside of the seat, at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

E2BLA308A E2BLA308B


183

Adjusting the height of seat cushion(for driver’s seat)To change the height of the seat cushion,rotate the knob located on the outside ofthe seat cushion.• To adjust the front height of the seat

cushion, rotate the knob.• To adjust the rear height of the seat

cushion, rotate the knob.

Front seat adjustment (Electric type, if equipped)✽ NOTICE• Power seats are driven by the electric

motor. Stop operating if the adjust-ment is completed. Excessive opera-tion may damage the electrical equip-ment.

• When in operation, the power seatsconsume large amount of electricalpower. To prevent unnecessary charg-ing system drain, don’t adjust thepower seats longer than necessarywhile the engine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more powerseat control buttons at the same time.Doing so may result in power seatmotor or electrical component mal-function.

Adjusting the seat forward and back-wardPush the control button forward or back-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the knob and the seatwill lock in the selected position.Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the control knob. If the seat moves,it is not locked properly.

E2BLA308C E2BLA340A

3 19


Adjusting height of the driver’s seatcushion (if equipped)Move the front portion of the control knobup to raise or down to lower the front partof the seat cushion.Move the rear portion of the control knobup to raise or down to lower the rear partof the seat cushion.To raise or lower the seat cushion, pull upor push down on the center of the corre-sponding switch. Release the knob oncethe seat reaches the desired position.

Adjusting the seatback reclinerMove the lever forward or backward tothe desired angle and release the lever. Ifthe lever is released, seatback will lock inplace. After adjustment, make sure thatthe lever has returned to its originallocked position.

E2BLA340B

E2BLA340C

E2BLA340D

E2BLA340E


203

Lumbar support (For driver’sseat, if equipped) You can adjust the lumbar support bymoving the lever on the side of the driv-er’s seatback.Pivoting the lever toward the front of thevehicle increases the lumbar support.Pivoting the lever toward the rear of thevehicle decreases the lumbar support.

Warming the front seats(if equipped)The front seats can be electrically heatedindividually when the ignition switch isON. When you depress the seat warmerswitch, a thermostat regulates seat tem-perature. To deactivate the heating sys-tem, depress the switch once again.

✽ NOTICE• The seat warmer will not operate if

ambient temperature is above 37±3°C(98.5±5.5°F).

• If the seat warmer doesn't work whenthe ambient temperature is below28±3°C (82.5±5.5°F), have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer.

OBL026002N

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Driving or riding in a vehicle with afront seatback reclined could leadto serious or fatal injury in an acci-dent. If a front seat is reclined dur-ing an accident, the occupant’s hipsmay slide under the lap portion ofthe safety belt applying great forceto the unprotected abdomen orneck or a passenger may be ejectedin a rollover. Serious or fatal inter-nal injuries could result. The drivermust advise the front passenger tokeep the seatbacks in comfortablyupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.

6BLA256

3 21


Headrest adjustmentAdjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and passengers, but alsohelps to protect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (➀). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button(➁) on the headrest support and lowerthe headrest to the desired position (➂).For best protection, adjust the headrestso its center is as high as your ears. Alsoadjust the headrest so its distance fromthe head is as wide as your fist.

WARNING - Seat heaterburns

Passengers should use extremecaution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. In particular, thedriver must exercise extreme carefor the following types of passen-gers:1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-

abled persons, or hospital outpa-tients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may damagethe surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats while the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components couldoccur.

OBL036911N

➀

➁

➂


223

Adjusting forward and backwardThe headrest may be adjusted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the headrestbackward, pull it fully forward to the far-thest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release lever (➀)while pulling upward (➁).

Split folding rear seat The rear seatbacks fold forward to pro-vide additional cargo space and to pro-vide access to the cargo area.• To fold the rear seatback(s) down, pull

the lock release lever, then fold theseatback forward and down.

• To raise the seatback, lift and push itfirmly until it clicks into place.

• When you return the seatback to itsupright position, reposition the rearsafety belts so that they can be usedby rear seat passengers.

WARNING - Headrest posi-tioning

To reduce the risk of head and neckinjuries, each occupant headrestmust be properly adjusted. Do notdrive the vehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly positioned.Do not adjust the driver's headrestwhile driving, or else loss of controland an accident is possible.

OBL036912N OBL036901LOBL036913N

➀

➁

3 23


To fold the rear seat1. Pull up the strap to lift the rear portion

of the seat cushion.

2. Remove the headrest and put theheadrest poles into the holes on therear of the seat cushion. (if equipped)

3. Pull the lock release lever on the seat-backs, then fold the seatback forwardand down firmly.

E2BLB301E

E2BLB301C E2BLB301D

CAUTION - Rear safetybelts

When returning the rear seatbacksto the upright position, rememberto return the rear shoulder belts totheir proper position. Routing thesafety belt webbing through therear safety belt guides will helpkeep the belts from being trappedbehind or under the seats.

S1BLB208

(if equipped)


243

To unfold the rear seat1. Lift and push the seatback backward

firmly until it clicks into place.2. Replace the headrest on the seatback.3. Push the seat cushion down firmly.

ArmrestThe armrest is located in the center ofthe rear seat. Pull the armrest down fromthe seatback.

CAUTION - Rear floorDo not remove the floor carpet inyour vehicle. Emission control sys-tem components in the area of therear seats cause high exhaust tem-peratures under the floor.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown aboutthe vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.Special care should be taken ofobjects placed in the rear seats,since those may hit the front seatoccupants in a frontal collision.

CAUTION - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, thetransmission is in P and the parkingbrake is applied whenever loadingor unloading cargo. Failure to takethese steps may allow the vehicle tomove if shift lever is inadvertentlymoved to another position.

E2BLB301F

3 25


Pre-tensioner safety belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver's andfront passenger's pre-tensioner safetybelts. The purpose of the pre-tensioneris to make sure that excess slack is takenup in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners may activate along with thefront air bags in frontal collisions basedon angle of impact, seat belt usage andimpact severity.

✽ NOTICEThe pre-tensioner seat belt is installed atthe front seats, and the sensor isequipped inside the buckle, where pres-ence of passenger is sensed by the fas-tening of the seat belts. Therefore, pre-tensioner will not activate if the passen-ger is not fastened with the seat belts.Likewise, it will activate if buckled evenwithout a passenger in the seat. Pre-ten-sioner seat belt is designed to activatewhen the seatbelt is in use. To ensure thepretensioner seatbelts activate in eventof a possible seatbelt buckle switch mal-function, the system is designed to acti-vate regardless of whether a seat belt isin use or if no seat belt use is detectedwithin 6 seconds of turning the ignitionswitch ON.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.➀ SRS air bag warning light➁ Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly➂ SRS air bag control module

SAFETY BELTS

2GHB3002 E4BLA3002 3

1 Passenger’sside air bag

Driver’s side air bag


263

Load limiter (if equipped)When the pre-tentioner activates, if thesystem senses excessive seat belt ten-sion on the driver or passenger’s seatbelt, the load limiter inside the pre-ten-sioner will release some of the pressureon the affected seat belt.

WARNING - Hot partsThe pre-tensioner assembly mecha-nism become hot during activation.Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assembly for several minutesafter they have been activated.

WARNING - Air bag/pre-tensioner warning light

If the SRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to “ON”, or if itremains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminateswhile the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Kia deal-er inspect the pre-tensioner and airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING - Air bag/Pre-tensioner dust

When the air bags and pre-tension-ers are activated, a loud noise maybe heard and fine dust, which mayappear to be smoke, may be visiblein the passenger compartment.Thisdust is not toxic. The dust maycause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods.Ventilate the vehicle after impactand wash your hands and face thor-oughly after an accident.

WARNING - Safety beltadjustment

To obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:• The safety belt must be worn cor-

rectly.• The safety belt must be adjusted

to the correct position.

3 27


Safety belt restraint system We strongly recommend that the driverand all passengers be properly restrainedat all times by using the safety belts pro-vided with the vehicle. Proper use of thesafety belts decreases the risk of severeinjury or death in accidents or suddenstops. In most states, and in Canada, thelaw requires their use.

All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertiallocks in the safety belt retractors allow allof the lap/shoulder safety belts to remainunlocked during normal vehicle opera-tion. This allows the occupants somefreedom of movement and increasedcomfort while using the safety belts. If aforce is applied to the vehicle, such as astrong stop, a sharp turn, or a collision,the safety belt retractors will automatical-ly lock the safety belts.

Since the inertial locks do not require acollision in order to lock up, you maybecome aware of the safety belts lockingwhile braking or going around sharp cor-ners.Always use the rear seat position(s) toinstall your child restraint(s).

WARNING - Replacingused pre-tensioners

• Pre-tensioners are designed tooperate once. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. All seat belts, of anytype, should always be replacedafter they have been worn duringa collision.

• Do not attempt to replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must bedone by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Damaging thepre-tensioners

• Do not hit or strike the pre-ten-sioner assemblies, especiallywith a tool or heavy object.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioners.

WARNING - Safety beltsTo minimize the risk of serious orfatal injury in an accident, the driv-er and all passengers should usethe appropriate safety restraints fortheir age and size. The presence ofair bags does not change the needto be properly restrained by a safe-ty belt or size-appropriate childrestraint. In fact, air bags aredesigned to work the best whenpassengers are correctly restrainedin the vehicle.• Be sure you are familiar with the

information in this section,including the information oninfant and child restraints.

• Read the safety warnings on thesunvisors of your vehicle also.


283

The rear safety belts use a special auto-lock feature designed to allow a childrestraint to be used in these positionswithout an added locking clip. They nor-mally lock only under extreme or emer-gency conditions (emergency lockmode). However they can be adjusted sothat they remain fixed and locked when achild restraint system is placed in thesepositions. (Use this auto-lock mode onlyto secure a child restraint, never for pas-sengers restrained by the safety belts.)Page 3-41 gives instructions on placingthe safety belt in the auto lock mode.The drivers safety belt can only operatein the emergency lock mode.

Safety belts provide the best restraintwhen:• The seatback is upright.• The occupant is sitting upright (not

slouched).• The lap belt is snug across the hips.• The shoulder belt is snug across the

chest.• The knees are straight forward.To help you remember to fasten yoursafety belt, a warning light will blink. See“Safety belt warning light and chime” onpage 3-30.

WARNING - Child restraintin front seat

Never install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger position,as an inflating air bag could causeserious or fatal injury to a child inthat position.

WARNING - After a colli-sion

• Lap/shoulder belt assembliesmay be stretched or damagedwhen subjected to the stress andforces of a collision.

• The entire restraint systemshould be inspected followingany collision. All belts, retractors,anchors and hardware damagedby a collision should be replacedbefore the vehicle is operatedagain.

WARNING - Cargo area Passengers should never beallowed to ride in the cargo area ofa vehicle. No safety belts are pro-vided for the cargo area. Personsriding in the vehicle without a fas-tened safety belt are much morelikely to suffer serious bodily injuryor death during an accident.

3 29


WARNING - Twisted beltsA twisted or jammed safety beltcannot restrain you properly. If youcannot untwist or unjam the safetybelt, have an authorized Kia dealerservice it immediately. Never driveor ride with a twisted or jammedsafety belt.

WARNING - Belt useSafety belts must be used correctlyto work properly in an accident.Each seating position in your vehi-cle has a specific safety belt assem-bly that includes a buckle andtongue designed to be used togeth-er.Failure to heed these warnings andfollow these instructions willincrease the risk and severity ofinjuries and the likelihood of deathin an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Use the shoulder portion of the

safety belt on the outside shoul-der only. Never wear the shoulderportion under the arm.

• Never swing the safety beltaround your neck to fit over theinside shoulder.

• Never wear the shoulder portionof the safety belt across the neckor face.

• Wear the lap portion as low aspossible. Be sure that the lap beltfits snugly around the hips.Never wear a lap portion of alap/shoulder belt over your waist;it should always go over thestronger area of your hips.

• Never use a single safety belt formore than one person.

• The front seatbacks shouldalways remain in a comfortable,upright position when the vehicleis moving.

WARNING - Safety beltcare

• A damaged belt may not give youthe protection you need in anaccident.

• Inspect your safety belts periodi-cally for excessive wear or dam-age. Pull out each belt fully andlook for fraying, cuts, burns orother damage. Pull the safety beltout and let it retract a number oftimes. Make sure that thelap/shoulder belts return smooth-ly and easily into the retractor.

• Check the latches to make surethey latch and release withoutinterference or delay.

• Never close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt.

• Any belt not in good condition orin good working order should bepromptly replaced.


303

Safety belt warning light andchimeIf the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning light blinks untilthe belt fastened.If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is ON, the safe-ty belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds. At this time, ifthe safety belt is fastened, the chime willstop at once.

Lap/shoulder beltTo fasten the front lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out

from the retractor.

W-29 S2BLA371

WARNINGNever close the doors on any partof the lap or shoulder belt. It candamage the safety belt or bucklewhich could increase the risk ofinjury in case of an accident.

3 31


3. Insert the tongue plate (➀) into theopen end of the buckle (➁) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicating thebelt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (➀) of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THE HIPSas possible to reduce the risk of slidingunder it during an accident. Adjust thebelt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up onthe shoulder portion (➁) of the safetybelt. The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automaticallyand to maintain tension on the belt. Foryour safety, do not put any excessslack into the safety belt at any loca-tion.

5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size. To raise the anchor position,push the anchor up. To lower theanchor position, press the button andslide the anchor down. After adjust-ment, make sure the anchor is lockedin position.

If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck.

S2BLA372 S2BLA373 OBL036905N

➀➁

➀

➁


323

To unfasten the front lap/shoulderbelt:Press the release button on the buckleand allow the belt to slowly retract.

Rear lap/shoulder belt To fasten the rear lap/shoulder belt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out.3. Insert the tongue plate (➀) into the

open end of the buckle (➁) until anaudible “click’’ is heard, indicating thebelt is locked in the buckle.

WARNING• The height adjuster must be in

the locked position when thevehicle is moving.

• The misadjustment of height ofthe shoulder belt could reducethe effectiveness of the seat beltin a crash.

S2BLA374 S2BLA372

➀➁

3 33


4. Position the lap portion (➀) of the beltacross your lap as LOW ON THE HIPSas possible to reduce the risk of slidingunder it during an accident. Adjust thebelt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up onthe shoulder portion (➁) of the safetybelt. The belt retractor is designed totake up excess webbing automaticallyand to maintain tension on the belt. Foryour safety do not put any excessslack into the safety belt.

To unfasten the rear lap/shoulderbelt:Press the release button on the buckleand allow the belt to slowly retract.

3 Point rear center belt (if equipped) To fasten the rear center belt1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole

on the belt assembly cover and slowlypull the tongue plates out from theretractor.

CAUTION - Cargo Be sure that the cargo is securelyloaded in the rear cargo area.Loose cargo may damage the rearcenter safety belt in sudden stopsor certain collisions.

OBL036302NS2BLA374S2BLA373

➀

➁


343

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into theopen end of the buckle (C) until anaudible “click" is heard, indicating thelatch is locked. Make sure the belt isnot twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert thetongue plate (B) into the open end ofthe buckle (D) until an audible “click” isheard, indicating the latch is locked.Make sure the belt is not twisted.

There will be an audible “click” when thetab locks in the buckle. The safety beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,if you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let youmove around. If there is a sudden stop orimpact, the belt will lock into position. Itwill also lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

WARNINGWhen using the rear safety centerbelt, you must lock all tongue platesand buckles. If any tongue plate orbuckle is not locked, it will increasethe chance of injury in the event ofcollision.

(D)

(B)

PRES

S

E2BLC304(D)

(A)

(C)

(B)

S2BLB303A

3 35


To unfasten the rear center belt 1. Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)from the buckle (D).

2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,insert the key or similar small rigiddevice into the web release button (E)on the anchor connector. Pull up onthe seat belt web (A) and allow thewebbing to retract automatically.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the hole onthe belt assembly cover.

When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must beused.

OBL036304NOBL036303N OVQ036226N


363

Stowing the rear safety belt The rear safety belt buckles can bestowed in the pocket between the rearseatback and cushion when not in use.

Proper use and care of the safetybelt system To ensure that the safety belts providethe maximum protection, please followthese instructions:• Use the belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it

prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the belts.• Periodically inspect belt webbing,

anchors, buckles and all other parts forsigns of wear and damage. Replacedamaged, excessively worn or ques-tionable parts immediately.

• To clean the belt webbing, use a mildsoap solution recommended for clean-ing upholstery or carpets. Follow theinstructions provided with the soap.

• Do not make modifications or additionsto the safety belt.

• After wearing a safety belt, make sureit fully retracts to the stowed position.Do not allow the belt to get caught inthe door when you close it.

WARNING - Belt cleaningDo not bleach or dye the webbingbecause this may weaken the web-bing fibers and allow them to failwhen restraining an occupant in acollision.

E2BLB301G

CAUTION - Damaging rearsafety buckles

When you fold the rear seatback orput luggage on the rear seat cush-ion, you must insert the buckle intothe pocket in the seatback. Doingso can prevent the buckle frombeing crushed by the rear seatbackor luggage.

3 37


Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE.

Restraint of infants and smallchildren To increase their safety, infants andyoung children should always berestrained by a restraint systemapproved for their age and size.Never allow a child to stand or kneel onthe seat of a moving vehicle. Never allowa safety belt to be placed around both achild and an adult or around two childrenat the same time.It is best for children to be seated in therear seats.Many companies manufacture childrestraint systems (often called childseats) for infants and small children. Anacceptable child restraint system mustalways satisfy Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards and your applicablestate laws. Make sure that any child-restraint system you use in your vehicleis labelled as complying with FederalSafety Standards.The child-restraint system should bechosen to fit both the size of the child andthe size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to fol-low any instructions provided by thechild-restraint system manufacturerwhen installing the child-restraint system.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomen wherethe fetus is located or above theabdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.

WARNING - Children onlaps

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms in a moving vehicle.Even a very strong person cannothold onto a child in the event ofeven a minor collision.

WARNING - Hot metalparts

Safety belts and seats can becomehot in a vehicle that has beenclosed during warm/hot weather;they could burn a child. Check seatcovers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


383

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If safety belts are not properlyworn and adjusted, there is a riskof death or serious injury to sucha child.

Restraint of larger children As children grow, they may need to usenew child-restraint systems, includinglarger child seats or booster seats, whichare appropriate for their increased size.A child who has outgrown available child-restraint systems should use the beltsprovided in the vehicle. When seated inthe rear outboard seats, the child shouldbe restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available from inde-pendent manufacturers which help pullthe shoulder belt down and away fromthe child’s face or neck.

WARNING - Infants andyoung children

• Infants and young children are atmuch greater risk of serious injuryor death in an accident or suddenstop if they are unrestrained orrestrained improperly. Follow allinstructions in this section and theinstructions that came with anapproved child safety system. Thechild restraint must be correctlyinstalled in the vehicle, and thechild must be correctly placed inthe child restraint.

• All children under 12 are safest inthe back seat.

• Never install a rear facing infantseat in the front passenger posi-tion. The baby will be injured orkilled by the air bag if it deploys.

• Never allow a child to stand orkneel on the seat of a moving vehi-cle.

3 39


Child restraint system For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is strongly rec-ommended and is required by law inalmost all states. This child seat or infantseat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.Children riding in the car should sit onthe rear seat and must always be proper-ly restrained to minimize the risk of injuryin an accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat.Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car andseat belts, and fits your child. Follow allthe instructions provided by the childseat manufacturer when installing thechild restraint system.

WARNING - Childrestraints

• A child restraint system must beplaced in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger air bag todeploy, it could severely injure orkill an infant or child seated in thefront seat.

• Since a safety belt or childrestraint system can become veryhot if it is in a closed vehicle, besure to check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a childthere.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the trunkor fasten it with a safety belt sothat it will not be thrown forwardin the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

• Children who are too large to bein a child restraint should sit inthe rear seat and be restrainedwith the available lap/shoulderbelts.

• When using the vehicleslap/shoulder safety belts, alwaysmake sure that the shoulder beltportion is positioned midwayover the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or behind the back. Thelap belt portion of the lap/shoul-der belt must always be posi-tioned as low as possible on thechild's hips and as snug as pos-sible.

• If the vehicle’s safety belt will notproperly fit the child, you mustuse an appropriate child restraintor booster seat in the rear.

(Continued)

ADAIRBAG


403

Installing a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat,because of the danger that an inflat-ing passenger side air bag couldimpact the rear-facing child restraintand kill the child.Since all passenger safety belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), you mustmanually change these safety belts tothe auto lock mode to secure a childrestraint.

(Continued)• Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel while the vehicle is moving.• Never use an infant carrier or

child seat that "hooks" over aseatback. It will not provide ade-quate protection in an accident.

• Never allow a child to be heldwhile they are in a moving vehi-cle, as this could result in seriousinjury to the child in the event ofan accident or a sudden stop.Holding a child in a moving vehi-cle does not provide the childwith any protection during anaccident, even if the person hold-ing the child is wearing a seatbelt.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• Before installing the childrestraint system, read the instruc-tions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the safety belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediatelyby your authorized Kia dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual'sinstructions regarding childrestraint system and the instruc-tions provided with the childrestraint system could increasethe chance and/or severity ofinjury in an accident.

3 41


Placing a passenger safety belt intothe auto lock modeThe use of the auto lock mode willensure that the normal movement of thechild in the vehicle does not cause thesafety belt to be pulled out and loosenthe firmness of its hold on the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the following proce-dure.

Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the safety beltwebbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it iseasy to access in case of an emergency.

E2MS103005 E2BLD310


423

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safetybelt all the way out. When the shoulderportion of the safety belt is fullyextended, it will shift the retractor tothe “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe safety belt to retract and listen foran audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”sound. This indicates that the retractoris in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on thechild restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the safety belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the safety belt and repeatsteps 2 through 6.

MMSA3028

"Click"

MMSA3029 MMSA3030

3 43


7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attempting topull more of the safety belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the safety belt toretract fully.

When the safety belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Auto Lock” mode to theemergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with“Tether Anchor” system Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the floor behind the rear seats.1. Open the tether anchor cover on the

floor behind the rear seats.

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.If the safety belt is not placed in the“Auto lock” mode, severe injury ordeath could occur to the childand/or other occupants in the vehi-cle in a collision, since the childrestraint will not be effectively heldin place.

S2BLD348

Tether anchorcover

Tetherstraphook

Child restraint hook holder


443

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrest,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING - Tether strapIf the tether strap is secured incor-rectly, the child restraint seat maynot be restrained properly in theevent of a collision. Do not mountmore than one child restraint seatto a tether anchorage, since theanchorage can then fail in a colli-sion.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or come awaycausing death or injury.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

E2BLD349N

3 45


Child seat lower anchorsSome child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asLATCH or LATCH compatible. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children". These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to two LATCH anchors atspecific seating positions in your vehicle.This type of child restraint seat elimi-nates the need to use seat belts to attachthe child seat in the rear seats.

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noLATCH anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The LATCH anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the LATCH and tetheranchors. Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tilt theseat from side to side. Also try to tug theseat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

1KMB3541 S2BLC354/OBL036904N

CAUTIONDo not allow the rear seat belt web-bing to get scratched or pinched bythe child-seat latch and LATCHanchor during the installation.


463

WARNING - LATCHAnchors

If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beingseriously injured or killed in a colli-sion greatly increases.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle’s “LATCH”system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to beused with the left and right rear out-board seating positions. Neverattempt to attach an LATCHequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may fail andbreak in a collision.

3 47


AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SRSAIRBAG

➀ Driver’s air bag ➃ Driver’s knee air bag➁ Front passenger’sair bag

➂ Curtain Air bag

➅ Front impact sensor

➆ SRS control module

E2BLA422B/6BLA002A/S2BLD320A/E2BLA371A/OBL036702/1VQA2079/5BLA370/OBL063001/OBL036004/5BLA370/OBL063002N

➄ Side impact sensor

➇ Occupant classifica-tion system

SRSAIRBAG


483

WARNING - Air bags &safety belts

• Even in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengers mustalways wear the safety belts pro-vided in order to minimize the riskand severity of injury in the eventof a collision or rollover.

• Always wear your safety belt. Itcan help keep you away from theair bags during heavy brakingjust before a collision. It may alsoreduce the risk of occupant ejec-tion.

• If vehicle occupants are not wear-ing their seatbelts properly, or arenot seated correctly, seriousinjury or death could occur.

• Driver’s and front passenger’s airbags are designed to inflate onlyin certain frontal collisions, andcurtain air bags are designed toinflate in certain side impacts.

(Continued)

What your air bag system doesDriver’s air bag and front passenger’s airbag are designed to supplement the pro-tection offered by the safety belt in cer-tain frontal collisions. Likewise, curtain airbags are designed to supplement theprotection offered by the safety belt inside collisions. Safety belts are designedto reduce the injury of the driver or pas-sengers in case of light impact or colli-sion. However, to help reduce impact ondriver or passengers in a serious colli-sion, seat belts must also be worn cor-rectly.

What your air bag system doesnot doThe air bag system is designed to sup-plement the protection offered by thesafety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUBSTI-TUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.

The importance of using safetybeltsThere are four very important reasons touse safety belts even with an air bagsupplemental restraint system. They:• help keep you in the proper position

(away from the air bag) when it inflates.• reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side

impact or rear impact collisions,because an air bag is not designed toinflate in such situations and even aside curtain air bag is designed toinflate only in certain side impact colli-sions.

• reduce the risk of harm in frontal orside collisions which are not severeenough to actuate the air bag supple-mental restraint system.

• reduce the risk of being thrown fromyour vehicle.

3 49


Air bag system components The main components of your SRS are:• To indicate that your vehicle is

equipped with air bags, the corre-sponding air bag covers are markedwith “SRS AIR BAG”.- Driver’s air bag- Driver’s knee air bag- Front passenger’s air bag- Curtain air bag

• A diagnostic system that continuallymonitors the system operation.

• An indicator light to warn you of a pos-sible problem with the system.

• Emergency power backup in case yourcar’s electrical system is disconnectedin a crash.

Your vehicles SRS uses a variety of sen-sors to monitor the driver’s and front pas-senger’s safety belt usage and impactseverity.The safety belt usage sensors determineif the driver and front passenger’s safetybelts are fastened. These sensors pro-vide the ability to control the SRS deploy-ment based on whether or not the safetybelts are fastened, and how severe theimpact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the air bag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided for mod-erate-severity impacts. A second stagelevel is provided for more severe impacts.According to the impact severity andsafety belt usage, the SRSCM (SRSControl Module) controls the air bag infla-tion. Failure to properly wear safety beltscan increase the risk or severity of injuryin an accident.Additionally, your SRS is equipped withan occupant classification system in thefront passenger’s seat. The occupantclassification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the front passen-ger’s seat and will turn off the front pas-senger’s air bag under certain conditions.For more detail, see “OccupantClassification System” later in this sec-tion.

(Continued)They will generally not provideprotection in side impacts (exceptcurtain air bags) or rear impacts,rollovers, less severe frontal colli-sions. They will not provide pro-tection from later impacts in amulti-impact collision.

• If your vehicle has been subject-ed to flood conditions (e.g.soaked carpeting/standing wateron the floor of the vehicle, etc.) orif your vehicle has become flooddamaged in any way, do notattempt to start the vehicle or putthe key in the ignition before dis-connecting the battery. This maycause air bag deployment, whichcould result in serious personalinjury or death. If your vehicle hasbeen subjected to flooded condi-tions, before attempting to startthe vehicle, have the vehicletowed to an authorized Kia dealerfor inspection and necessaryrepairs.


503

Driver’s air bagThe driver’s air bag is stored in the cen-ter of the steering wheel.

WARNING• Ignoring the SRS indictor light

(air bag indicator and passengerair bag off indicator) can result inserious or fatal injury if the airbags occupant classification sys-tem or pretensioners do not workproperly. Have your car checkedby a dealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS warning light alerts youto a potential problem.

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-tion can result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright in their seatswith their feet on the floor untilthe vehicle is parked and the igni-tion key is removed.

E2BLA422B

HLZ2120

WARNING• You must always sit as far back

from the steering wheel air bag aspossible (chest at least 250 mm(10 inches) away from the steer-ing wheel), while still maintaininga comfortable seating position forgood vehicle control, in order toreduce the risk of injury or deathin a collision.

• Never place objects over the airbag storage compartments orbetween the air bags and your-self. Due to the speed and force ofthe air bag inflation, such objectscould hit your body at high speedand cause severe bodily injuryand even death.

• Do not put stickers or ornamentson the steering wheel cover.These may interfere with thedeployment of the air bag.

3 51


Driver's knee air bagThe driver's knee air bag is stored belowthe steering wheel of the instrumentpanel.This works in conjunction with the frontalairbags in a certain frontal impact colli-sion to protect the knee of the driver.

Front passenger’s air bagThe front passenger’s air bag is stored inthe instrument panel, above the glovebox area.Since you cannot anticipate which airbags will deploy or from what direction,never put any objects or ornaments onthe instrument panel.

Occupant classification systemThe occupant classification systemdetects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turnoff the front passenger's air bag undercertain conditions.The occupant classification system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determineif the front passenger's air bag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.Only the front passenger front air bag iscontrolled by the Occupant ClassificationSystem.

6BLA002A

HLZ2121

5BLA370OBL036702

OBL036700N


523

Main components of occupant classi-fication system• A detection device located within the

front passenger seat cushion.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag systemshould be activated or deactivated.

• A warning light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates thewords "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicating the front passenger air bagsystem is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warninglight is interconnected with the occu-pant classification system.

If there is no passenger in the front pas-senger seat or if the passenger in thefront passenger seat is very light, (suchas a child), the front PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator may illuminate.When this indicator is ON, the front pas-senger air bag will not deploy.

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person's legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the safety belt.• The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front

of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest-

ing them on other locations whichreduce the passenger weight on thefront seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seat back.

OBL036450

The location of OCSwarning indicator

3 53


• The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates after the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position orafter the engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is unoccupied or isoccupied by very small person, or isoccupied by someone who is improp-erly seated, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will remain illumi-nated and the front passenger air bagwill not deploy in frontal crashes. If thefront passenger seat is occupied bysomeone of adult size and bodyshape, the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator will turn off after 6 sec-onds and the front passenger's air bagwill deploy in frontal crashes.

• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates, the front passen-ger air bag will not deploy in either aside or frontal collision.

• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator is not illuminated, the frontpassenger air bag may deploy infrontal collision.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupantclassification system

*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a small-er adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as a child depending on his/her physique and sitting posture.

*2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits inthe front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as anadult depending on his/her physique sitting posture, or objects in thelap of the occupant.

Conditiondetected by theoccupant classi-fication system

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2 orchild restraintsystem

3. Unoccupied

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

"PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF"indicator light

SRS warninglight

Front passen-ger air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices


543

WARNINGIf the front passenger seat shouldbe modified for persons with dis-abilities that may affect the opera-tion of the occupant classificationsystem, contact an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNINGIf the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator illuminates or blinks con-tinuously when a person of adultsize sits in the front passenger'sseat, it could be because that per-son isn't sitting properly in the seat.If this happens, turn the vehicle off,make sure the seat back is notreclined, have the passenger centeron the seat cushion, with legs com-fortably extended, and the safetybelt properly positioned. Restartthe vehicle and have the personremain in this position long enoughto allow the system to detect theperson and activate the passengerair bag.

WARNINGIf the occupant classification sys-tem is not working properly, the airbag warning light ( ) on theinstrument panel will illuminate. Ifthere is a malfunction of the occu-pant classification system, the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator will illuminate and the frontpassenger's air bag will not deployin frontal crashes even if there is anadult sized occupant in the frontpassenger seat. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition key is turned to"ON" position, if it remains illumi-nated after blinking for approxi-mately six seconds, or if it illumi-nates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Kia deal-er inspect the occupant classifica-tion system with the SRS air bagsystem as soon as possible.

AIRBAG

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant clas-sification system, children aged12 and under should be seated inthe rear seats. Do not install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger seat. The child couldbe severely injured or killed if theair bag deploys. Children areafforded the most protection inthe event of an accident whenthey are restrained by the properrestraint system in the rear seat.

(Continued)

3 55


(Continued)• If a very low weight adult is seat-

ed in the front passenger seat, theoccupant classification systemmay or may not turn off the rightfront passenger air bag, depend-ing upon the person's seatingposition and body type. Everyonein your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly -- whether ornot there is an air bag for that per-son.

• If the front seat passengerchanges their seating position(for example, by not sittingupright, by sitting on the edge ofthe seat, or by otherwise beingout of position), the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator maybe turned on, and the passengerair bag may not deploy in a colli-sion. Always be sure to sit prop-erly in the front passenger seatand wear the safety belt properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

(Continued)

(Continued)

(Continued)

1KMN3661

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center con-sole.

- Never sit on one side of the frontpassenger seat.


563

✽ NOTICE• If luggage or other objects are placed

on the front passenger's seat or if thetemperature of the seat changes whilethe seat is unoccupied, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator mayblink. These conditions do not indi-cate a problem.

• Do not put heavy objects on the frontpassenger's seat. This may cause frontpassenger air bag deployment in theevent of an accident, thus increasingyour repair costs.

(Continued)

(Continued)

1KMN3665

1KMN3666

- Always sit in a proper seatingposition.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

(Continued)• Do not modify or replace the front

passenger’s seat. Don't place orattach anything on the front pas-senger’s seat. This can adverselyaffect the occupant classificationsystem.

• Do not place sharp objects on thefront passenger seat. These candamage the occupant classifica-tion system, if they puncture theseat cushion.

• Do not install accessory seat cov-ers on the front seats, since thesewill interfere with proper sensoroperation.

3 57


Curtain air bagCurtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants andthe rear outboard seat occupants in cer-tain side impact collisions.

WARNING• The front seat passenger air bag

is much larger than the steeringwheel air bag and inflates withconsiderably more force. It canseriously hurt or kill a passengerwho is not in the proper positionand wearing the safety belt prop-erly. The front passengers shouldalways move their seat as farback as practical and sit back intheir seat.

• It is essential that the front pas-sengers always wear their safetybelts when vehicle is in motion,even when the vehicle is movingin a parking lot or up a drivewayinto garage.

• If the driver brakes the vehicleheavily prior to an impact, unbelt-ed occupants will be thrown for-ward. If the front passenger is notwearing the safety belts, they willbe directly in front of the air bagswhen deployment occurs. In thatsituation, serious injury or deathis possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never allow front passenger to

put their hands, feet or face on orclose to the instrument panel. Inthe event of air bag deployment,such a mispositioned occupantwould be likely to suffer severeinjury or death.

• Never allow children/old and fee-ble persons/pregnant women tosit on the front passenger’s seat.They may be seriously injured bythe air bag inflation when air bagdeploys.

• Do not put objects or stickers onthe instrument panel. Do notapply any accessory to the frontwindshield. Do not install after-market mirrors or accessories onthe factory-installed rearview mir-ror. Any of these could interferewith the deployment of the air bagor could hit your body at highspeed and cause severe bodilyinjury and even death.

S2BLA351


583

• The curtain air bag deployment occursonly on the side of the vehicle affectedby the impact.

• The curtain air bags are not designedto deploy during collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crashseverity, angle, speed and impact.

(Continued)• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated on theseats where curtain air bags areequipped.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the curtain air bagsystem. This should be done onlyby an authorized Kia dealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result insevere injury or death to the vehicleoccupants in an accident.

WARNING• In order for the curtain air bags to

provide its best protection, bothfront seat occupants and bothoutboard rear occupants shouldsit in an upright position with thesafety belts properly fastened.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure to putthe child restraint system as faraway from the door side as possi-ble, and secure the child restraintsystem in position.

(Continued)

3 59


Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision?(Inflation and non-inflation conditionsof the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not be expectedto provide additional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impact acci-dents, as well as low speed impacts. Inother words, just because your vehicle isdamaged and even if it is totally unus-able, don’t be surprised that the air bagsdid not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor(3) Side impact sensor

OBL063003/OBL036004/OBL063001/1VQA2079


603

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where airbag or sensors are installed.This may cause unexpected airbag deployment, which couldresult in severe personal injury ordeath.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by theauthorized Kia dealer.

• Problems may arise if the sensorinstallation angles are changeddue to the deformation of frontbumper, body or B pillar whereside collision sensors areinstalled. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by theauthorized Kia dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy theair bag(s) in certain collisions.Installing aftermarket bumperguards or replacing a bumperwith non-genuine parts mayadversely affect your vehiclescollision and air bag deploymentperformance.

Air bag inflation conditionFront air bag

Front air bags (driver’s and front passen-ger’s air bags and driver’s knee air bag)are designed to inflate when the impactis delivered to front collision sensorsdepending on the intensity, speed orangles of impact of the front collision -generally from an area a little to the left toa little to the right of straight ahead.

OBL0367001N

3 61


Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are designed to inflatewhen the impact signal is delivered to theside collision sensors, depending on theseverity, speed, and/or angle of theimpact or rollover.

Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags and driver’sknee air bag) are designed to inflate onlyin frontal collision, it may inflate in anycollision if front impact sensors detect asufficient impact.Curtain air bags are designed to inflateonly in side impact collision, but mayinflate in any collision if side impact sen-sors detect a sufficient impact.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roadsor sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or on sur-faces not designed for vehicle traffic toprevent unintended air bag deployment.To protect occupants, front air bags andpre-tensioner safety belts may deploy incertain side impact collisions.

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In collisions, the vehicle safety belts

are sufficient to protect the vehicleoccupants and the air bags may notdeploy. In some cases, deploying airbags in low-speed collisions can causea secondary impact to the occupants(light abrasions, cuts, burns, etc.), orloss of vehicle control.

OVQ036018N

S2BLA351

1VQA2086


623

• Air bags may not inflate in rear colli-sions, because occupants are movedbackward by the force of the impact. Inthis case, the air bags do not provideprotection.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collision, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,and thus front air bag deployment doesnot provide proper protection.However, curtain air bags may inflatedepending on the intensity, vehiclespeed and angles of impact.

• In a slant impact or collision, the forcedelivered will be relatively weaker thanthat of frontal or side collision. So, theair bags may not inflate.

1VQA2087 OVQ036018N 1VQA2089

3 63


• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly altered by such “under-ride” col-lisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-dents. Air bag deployment would notprovide proper protection to the occu-pants.However, curtain air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point ofimpact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not deliv-ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090N 1VQA2091 1VQA2092


643

How does the air bag systemoperate• Air bag only operates when the ignition

switch is turned to ON or START posi-tion.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event ofserious frontal or side collision in orderto help protect the occupants from seri-ous physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which theair bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate by the severity of a collision andits direction. These two factors deter-mine whether the sensors send out anelectronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and the densi-ty and stiffness of the vehicles orobjects which your vehicle hits in thecollision. Though, factors are not limit-ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you to seethe air bags inflate during an accident.It is much more likely that you will sim-ply see the deflated air bags hangingout of their storage compartments afterthe collision.

• In order to help provide protection in asevere collision, the air bags mustinflate rapidly. The speed of air baginflation has been determined by theCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (CMVSS) to reduce the like-lihood of serious or life-threateninginjuries and is thus a mandatory part ofthe air bag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruises andbroken bones, and sometimes moreserious injuries because the inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the steer-ing wheel air bag can cause fatalinjuries, especially if the occupantis positioned excessively close tothe steering wheel.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal injury or

death caused by deploying airbags in a collision, the drivershould sit as far back from thesteering wheel air bag as possi-ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)away). The front passengershould always move their seat asfar back as possible and sit backin their seat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in anevent of collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are not inproper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normally includefacial or bodily abrasions, injuriesby broken glass or burns by theexplosives.

3 65


Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of the igni-tion of the air bag inflator. After the airbag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-comfort in breathing due to the contact ofyour chest to both the safety belt and theair bag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. We strongly urgeyou to open your doors and/or win-dows as soon as possible after impactin order to reduce discomfort and pre-vent prolonged exposure to thesmoke and powder.Though the smoke and powder are non-toxic, they may cause irritation (eyes,nose and throat, etc.). Wash and rinsewith cold water immediately and consulta doctor if symptoms persist.

Installing a child restraint on a frontpassenger seat is extremely danger-ous and should never be done.Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing severe or fatalinjuries.In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it may cause severe or fatalinjuries to the child.

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in steering wheeland/or instrument panel and/or inboth sides of the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors are veryhot. To prevent injury, do not touchthe air bag storage areas internalcomponents immediately after anair bag has inflated. 1JBH3051


663

Air bag warning lightThe purpose of air bag warning light inyour instrument panel is to alert you of apotential problem with your air bag -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).When the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light should blink or illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds, thengo off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after the engine

starts.• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

Air bag (Supplemental RestraintSystem) service Your Supplemental Restraint System isvirtually maintenance-free. There are noparts which you can service.You must have the system servicedunder the following circumstances:• If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag

must be replaced. Do not try to removeor discard the air bag by yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Kiadealer.

• If the air bag warning indicator lightalerts you to a problem, have the airbag system checked as soon as possi-ble. Otherwise, your air bag systemmay be ineffective.

WARNING• Never put child restraint in the

front passenger seat. If the frontpassenger air bag inflates, it maycause severe or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats in which cur-tain air bags are equipped, besure to put the child restraint sys-tem as far away from the doorside as possible, and secure thechild restraint system to belocked in position.Inflation of curtain air bag couldcause severe injury or death dueto the expansion impact.

AIR

BAG

CAUTIONDo not modify any part of the airbag system. Modification couldmake the air bag system ineffectiveor could cause unnecessarydeployment.

3 67


Repairing or scrapping the vehi-cles • Repairing steering wheel, instrument

panel, center console or roofs, orinstalling car audio around center con-sole or painting front sheet metal coulddisable the air bag system. Have themchecked by an authorized Kia dealer.

• When leaving the vehicle at an autho-rized Kia dealer, inform that the vehicleis equipped with air bag system, andleave the owner’s manual in the vehi-cle.

• Since air bag system contains explo-sive chemical substances, contact anauthorized Kia dealer when scrappingthe vehicle.

WARNING• Do not modify your steering

wheel, seat or any other part ofthe Supplemental RestraintSystem. Modification could makethe system inoperable.

• Do not work on the system’s com-ponents or wiring. This couldcause the air bags to inflate inad-vertently, possibly seriously injur-ing someone.Working on the sys-tem could also disable the sys-tem so that the air bags would notdeploy in a collision.

• Any work on the SRS system,such as removing, installing,repairing, or any work on thesteering wheel must be per-formed by a qualified Kia techni-cian. Improper handling of the airbag system may result in seriouspersonal injury.


683

Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.

OBL073004N/1XTA1034A

3 69


Opening the hood:1. Pull the release lever on the lower left

side of the instrument panel to unlatchthe hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull the secondary latchinside of the hood center and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood. It will raise completelyby itself after it has been raisedhalfway.

HOOD

E2BLA419C OBL026001 E2BLA317A


703

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.Make sure the hood is properly lockedbefore driving.

WARNING - Hood• Before closing the hood, make

sure that all engine parts andtools have been removed fromthe engine area and that no one’shands are near the hood opening.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

3 71


1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

release button located on the driver’slower door. (if equipped)

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap issecurely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-ly and make sure that it is securelyclosed.

FUEL FILLER LID

WARNING - Refueling• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skinand thus subject you to the risk offire and burns. Always removethe fuel cap carefully and slowly.If the cap is venting fuel or if youhear a hissing sound, wait untilthe condition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

• Because your vehicle uses anORVR (On-board Refuelling VaporRecovery) system, “Top OFF” thevehicle very carefully to preventfuel splash-back.

E2BLC305F E2BLC318A

OPEN

CLOSE

WARNINGTo avoid injury from sharp edges, itis recommended that protectivegloves be worn if there is a need toopen the fuel filler door manually.


723

WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.• Before refueling note the location

of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.Always heed any warnings orcautions posted at the fuelingstation.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe distanceaway from the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbing orsliding against any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior to refu-eling. Static electricity dischargefrom the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. Once refu-eling has begun, contact with thevehicle should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

(Continued)

(Continued)Use only portable plastic fuelcontainers designed to carry andstore gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cellu-lar phones can potentially ignitefuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before startingthe engine.

(Continued)

3 73


✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid will not open in coldweather because the area around it isfrozen, push or lightly tap the lid.

Manual fuel filler lid release (if equipped)If the fuel filler lid is not open by using theremote button, open it by pulling out theemergency handle which is located in theright side storage in a cargo area.

(Continued)• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while at agas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel is high-ly flammable and can, when ignit-ed, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment or 911.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.• Check to make sure the fuel filler

cap is securely closed after refu-eling. A loose fuel filler cap maycause the "Check Engine"(Malfunction Indicator) light in theinstrument panel to illuminateunnecessarily.

• If the fuel filler cap requiresreplacement, use only a genuineKia cap or the equivalent speci-fied for your vehicle. An incorrectfuel filler cap can result in a seri-ous malfunction of the fuel sys-tem or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Any typeof fuel spilled on painted surfacesmay damage the paint.

E2BLA614D


743

The auto fuel cutoff switch is located onthe passenger’s side of the engine com-partment. In the event of a collision orsudden impact, the auto fuel cutoffdevice cuts off the fuel supply. If thisdevice is activated, it must be reset bypressing in on the top of the switchbefore the engine can be restarted.

MIRRORS Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles beforedriving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the control levers or remoteswitch, depending on the type of mirrorcontrol installed.The mirror heads can befolded back to prevent damage during anautomatic car wash or when passing in anarrow street.OBL036392N

WARNINGBefore resetting the auto fuel cutoffswitch, the fuel line should bechecked for fuel leaks.

WARNING- Rearview mir-rors

• The right outside rearview mirroris convex (if equipped). Objectsseen in the mirror are closer thanthey appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirroror direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the surfaceof the glass. If ice should restrictmovement of the mirror, do notforce the mirror for adjustment. Toremove ice, use a deicer spray, or asponge or soft cloth with very warmwater.

AUTO FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH(IF EQUIPPED)

3 75


Electric remote control (if equipped)The electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. Toadjust the position of either mirror, movethe lever to R or L to select the right sidemirror or the left side mirror, then press acorresponding point on the mirror adjust-ment control to position the selected mir-ror up, down, left or right.After adjustment, put the lever into neu-tral position to prevent the inadvertentadjustment.

Folding the outside rearview mirrorTo fold outside rearview mirror, grasp thehousing of mirror and then fold it towardthe rear of the vehicle.

L R

E1BLA255

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-ing angles, but the motor contin-ues to operate while the switch isdepressed. Do not depress theswitch longer than necessary, themotor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-side rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the parts. E1V2B03032


763

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the rear win-dow defroster. To heat the outsiderearview mirror glass, push the button forthe rear window defroster.The rearview mirror heater (and rear win-dow defroster) will not operate unless theengine is running.The outside rearview mirror glass will beheated for defrosting or defogging andwill give you improved rear vision ininclement weather conditions. Push thebutton again to turn the heater off. Theoutside rearview mirror heater automati-cally turns off after 20 minutes.

Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to center onthe view through the rear window. Makethis adjustment before you start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped) Manual type (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.Remember that you lose some rearviewclarity in the night position.

1KMA2089

Day

Night

Day/Night lever

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rear seator cargo area which would interferewith your vision out the rear win-dow.

3 77


Electric type (if equipped)

The electric day/night rearview mirrorautomatically controls the glare from theheadlights of the car behind you in night-time or low light driving conditions. Thesensor mounted in the mirror senses thelight level around the vehicle, andthrough a chemical reaction, automati-cally controls the headlight glare fromvehicles behind you.When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror.Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallygo to the brightest setting in order toimprove the drivers view behind the vehi-cle.

To operate the electric rearview mirrorPress the “I” button (➀) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function on. The mirrorindicator light will illuminate.Press the “O” button (➁) to turn the auto-matic- dimming function off. The mirrorindicator light will turn off.

2GHN3310➀ ➁

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror as that may cause the liq-uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-ing.

WARNINGWhen backing up, we recommendthe driver use the rear windowrather than the rearview mirror tosee objects in the road.

Indicator light


783

Your new mirror comes with an integrat-ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,which allows you to program the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate,home lighting, etc. The mirror actuallylearns the codes from your various exist-ing transmitters.

ProgrammingYour vehicle may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the ACC positionfor programming and/or operation ofHomeLink. It is also recommended that anew battery be replaced in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-ing and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency.Follow these steps to train yourHomeLink mirror:

HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• When programming the

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem, you may be operating agarage door or gate operator.Make sure that people and objectsare out of the way of the movingdoor or gate to prevent potentialharm or damage.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature asrequired by federal safety stan-dards. (This includes any garagedoor opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982.) A garagedoor opener which cannot detectan object, signaling the door tostop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards.Using a garage door opener with-out these features increases riskof serious injury or death. Formore information, call 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

• Retain the original transmitter forfuture programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchase). It isalso suggested that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink buttons be erased forsecurity purposes (follow step 1in the “Programming” portion ofthis text).

OVQ036305N

Glare detection sensorIndicator light

Homelink buttons

3 79


1. When programming the buttons for thefirst time, press and hold the left andcenter buttons ( , ) simultane-ously until the indicator light begins toflash after approximately 20 seconds.(This procedure erases the factory-setdefault codes. Do Not perform this stepto program additional hand-held trans-mitters.)

✽ NOTICEFor non rolling code garage door open-ers, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door openers,follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, please fol-low the Canadian Programming section.For help with determining whether yourgarage is non-rolling code or rollingcode, please refer to the garage dooropeners owner’s manual or contactHomeLink customer service at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on theHomeLink system you wish to trainand the button on the transmitter whilethe transmitter is approximately 1 to 3inches away from the mirror. Do notrelease the buttons until step 3 hasbeen completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light flashes rapidly, both but-tons may be released. (The rapid flash-ing light indicates successful program-ming of the new frequency signal.)

✽ NOTICESome gate operators and garage dooropeners may require you to replace step#3 with the “cycling” procedure noted inthe “Canadian Programming” sectionof this document.

OVQ036306N

Flashing

OVQ036307N

Flashing

1-3inc

hes

Transmitter


803

Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or otherrolling code equipped devices) with therolling code feature, follow these instruc-tions after completing the “Programming”portion of this text. (A second personmay make the following training proce-dures quicker & easier.) 4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on

the device’s motor head unit. Exactlocation and color of the button mayvary by product brand. If there is diffi-culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-ton, reference the device’s owner’smanual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button on the device’s motorhead unit. You have 30 seconds tocomplete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand release the programmedHomeLink button up to three times.The rolling code equipped deviceshould now recognize the HomeLinksignal and activate when theHomeLink button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now beprogrammed if this has not previouslybeen done. Refer to the“Programming” portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Activationwill now occur for the trained product(garage door, security system, entry doorlock, estate gate, or home or office light-ing). For convenience, the hand-heldtransmitter of the device may also beused at any time. The HomeLinkWireless Controls System (once pro-grammed) or the original hand-heldtransmitter may be used to activate thedevice (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,etc.). In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties, contact HomeLinkat 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Erasing programmed HomeLinkbuttonsTo erase the three programmed buttons(individual buttons cannot be erased):• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until the indi-cator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). Release both but-tons. Do not hold for longer than 30seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)mode and can be programmed at anytime.

OVQ036306N

Flashing

3 81


Reprogramming a singleHomeLink buttonTo program a device to HomeLink usinga HomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do NOT release until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inchesaway from the HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button (or press and “cycle” - asdescribed in “Canadian Programming”above).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,first slowly and then rapidly. When theindicator light begins to flash rapidly,release both buttons.

The previous device has now beenerased and the new device can be acti-vated by pushing the HomeLink buttonthat has just been programmed. This pro-cedure will not affect any other pro-grammed HomeLink buttons.

Gate operator programming &canadian programmingDuring programming, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press and hold theHomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4in the “Programming” portion of this text)while you press and re-press (“cycle”)your handheld transmitter every two sec-onds until the frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after several sec-onds upon successful training.

AccessoriesIf you would like additional information onthe HomeLink Wireless Control System,HomeLink compatible products, or topurchase other accessories such as theHomeLink® Lighting Package, pleasecontact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 oron the internet at www.homelink.com.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence including interference that maycause undesired operation of the vehi-cle.

CAUTIONIf programming a garage dooropener or gate, it is advised tounplug the device during the“cycling” process to prevent possi-ble motor burn-up. WARNING

Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.IC: 4112104541A Gentex MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3


823

Room lightFront (map light)The lights are turned ON or OFF bypressing the corresponding switch.

Center (dome light) / Rear cargo area light(1) OFF

: The light stays off even when a dooris open.

(2) DOOR/: The light turns on when a door isopened or when a door is unlockedby the transmitter (if equipped).Interior light goes out slowly after 30seconds if the doors including therear hatch and rear hatch window areall closed. However if the ignitionswitch is ON or all vehicle doors arelocked when the door is closed, inte-rior light will turn off even within 30seconds.

(3) ON: The light turns on and stays on evenwhen the doors are all closed.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

PUSH

TILT SLIDE

E2BLA430J

E2BLA430E

7KMA2122

Type A Center

Type B

OFF ON

ONOFFE2BLA325

➀ ➁ ➂

➀ ➁ ➂

Rear

3 83


Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)The door courtesy lamp comes ON whenthe door is opened to assist entering orexiting the vehicle. It also serves as awarning to passing vehicles that thevehicle door is open.

Center trayTo use the storage compartment, pressthe front face, and then release it to allowthe storage compartment to slowlyextend from the instrument panel.

E2BLA750A

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or otherflammable/explosive materials inthe vehicle. These items may catchfire and/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed whiledriving. Do not attempt to placeso many items in the storagecompartment that the storagecompartment cover can not closesecurely. OBL026020N

STORAGE COMPARTMENT


843

Multi Box The multi box may be opened by pullingit out by its handle grip. It can be used forstoring small items.

Center console storageThese compartments can be used tostore small items required by the driveror front passenger.To open the console storage compart-ment, pull up on the locking tab.

Under tray (If equipped)The under tray is located under the frontpassenger’s seat, and can be opened bypulling it out.

E2BLA411A E2BLA339B S2BLA370

3 85


Glove boxThe glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key.To open the glove box, make sure it isunlocked, then pull the handle and theglove box will automatically open. Closethe glove box after use.

Sunglass holder A sunglass storage compartment is pro-vided on the overhead console. To openthe sunglass holder, press the cover andthe holder will slowly open. Place yoursunglasses in the compartment door withthe lenses facing out. Push to close.

E2BLA313B

CAUTIONSince key is not fully inserted intothe glove box key set, do not applyexcessive force. Doing so may dam-age the parts.

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

PUSH

E2BLA430H

CAUTIONMake sure the sunglass holder isclosed while driving.

Type A

Type B


863

Cigarette lighterTo use the cigarette lighter, press thefront face then release it to allow thecigarette lighter and ashtray to slowlyextend from center panel.To operate the cigarette lighter, press it inand release it. When it is heated, it auto-matically pops out ready for use.If the engine is not running, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACC position forthe lighter to operate.

Ashtrays Front To use the ashtray, press the front faceand release it to allow the cigarettelighter and ashtray to slowly extend fromcenter panel.To remove the ashtray, grasp the ashtraybucket and carefully pull it out.

INTERIOR FEATURES

OBL026017N

CAUTION• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it willoverheat.

• Only a genuine Kia lighter shouldbe used in the cigarette lightersocket. The use of plug-in acces-sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-ums, and coffee pots, for exam-ple) may damage the socket orcause electrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove it toprevent overheating.

OBL026018N

3 87


Rear (if equipped)You can open the rear ashtray by pullingit out by its top edge. To remove the ash-tray to empty or clean it, push the tabinside and pull it all the way out.

Cup holderWARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtraysas waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matchesin an ashtray with other com-bustible materials may cause afire.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you could be burned.Such a burn to the driver couldcause a loss of control of thevehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or insecure bottles, glasses,cans, etc., in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion.

OBL026019L


883

FrontCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped) To use the rear cup holder, press thefront face, release it and extend from theconsole box.To return the cup holder to its closedposition, push it completely into the con-sole box. The cup holder latching mecha-nism will “click” when it is locked intoposition.

SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side window, pullit downward, unsnap it from the bracketand swing it to the side.Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward.To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and pull up the mirror cover.

✽ NOTICEClose the vanity mirror cover securelyand return the sunvisor to its originalposition after use.

OBL036400NOBL026021 OBL063005

CAUTION• Do not place heavy cups or cans

in cup holders. Cup holders couldbe damaged.

• Be careful not to step on the rearcup holder.

3 89


Power socket (if equipped)The power outlets are designed to pro-vide power for mobile telephones orother devices designed to operate withvehicle electrical systems. The devicesshould draw less than 10 amps with theengine running.

E2BLC303

OBL026023L

OBL026022N

(if equipped)

(if equipped)

CAUTION• Use when the engine is running,

and remove a plug from thepower outlet after using the elec-tric appliance. Using when theengine stops or remaining theelectric appliance with plugged infor many hours may cause thebattery to be discharged.

• Only use 12V electric applianceswhich are less than 10A in elec-tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operatinglevel when you have to use thepower socket.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle’spower outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio static andmalfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.

(if equipped)


903

Digital clockWhen the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operatesas follows:

• HOUR:Pressing the “H” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by onehour.

• MINUTE:Pressing the “M” button with your fin-ger, a pencil or similar object willadvance the time displayed by oneminute.

• RESET:To clear away minutes, press the “R”button with your finger, a pencil or sim-ilar object. Then the clock will be setprecisely on the hour.For example, if the “R” button ispressed while the time is between 9:01and 9:29, the display will be reset to9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 ➾ 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 ➾ 10:00OBL026016N

3 91


If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroofwith the sunroof control buttons locatedon the overhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.

Sliding the sunroof The sunroof can be opened or closedwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position. To slide the sunroof, momentar-ily press “OPEN” ( ) on the SLIDEswitch. The sunroof will slide all the wayopen. To stop the sunroof sliding at anypoint, press any sunroof switch. To closethe sunroof, press “CLOSE” ( ) onthe SLIDE switch and hold it until it isclosed completely.

Tilting the sunroof To tilt the sunroof, momentarily press“UP” ( ) on the TILT switch. The sun-roof will tilt all the way up. To stop thesunroof tilting at any point, press anysunroof switches.To close it, press “DOWN” ( ) on theTILT switch and hold it until it is closedcompletely.

✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tilted whilein an open or slide position.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTIONDo not continue to press the sun-roof control button(s) after the sun-roof is in the fully open, closed, ortilt position(s). Damage to the motoror system components couldoccur.

PUSH

TILT SLIDE

E2BLA430C

PUSH

TILT SLIDE

E2BLA430G


923

SunshadeThe sunshade will be opened with theglass panel automatically when the glasspanel is slid. After closing the glass panelthe sunshade will only close manually.

In case of an emergency Type A (without multi-meter)If the sunroof does not open electrically:1. Remove the interior light lens by using

a flat blade screwdriver.2. Remove the two (2) screws, and then

remove the overhead console.3. Insert the emergency handle (provided

with the vehicle) and turn the handleclockwise to open or counterclockwiseto close.

E2BLA361 S2BLA329N

CAUTION• Do not press any sunroof control

button longer than necessary.Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

• Periodically remove any dirt thatmay accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could be dam-aged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with sunshade. Do notleave the sunshade closed whilethe sunroof is open.

WARNING - Sunroof• Do not extend face or arms out-

side through the sunroof openingwhile driving.

• Make sure hand and face aresafely out of the way before clos-ing a sunroof.

3 93


Type B (with multi-meter)If the sunroof does not open electrically:1. Open sunglass holder.2. Break tab to open access hold for

emergency handle.3. Insert the emergency handle (provided

with the vehicle) and turn the handleclockwise to open or counterclockwiseto close.

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or you use theemergency handle to operate the sun-roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-tem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-tion.

2. According to the position of the sun-roof, do as follows.1) in case that the sunroof has closed

completely or been tilted :Press the TILT UP button until thesunroof has tilted upward com-pletely.

2) in case that the sunroof has slide-opened:Press and hold the CLOSE button for more than 5 secondsuntil the sunroof has closed com-pletely. Press the TILT UP buttonuntil the sunroof has tilted upwardcompletely.

3. Release the TILT UP button.4. Press and hold the TILT UP button

once again until the sunroof hasreturned to the original position of TILTUP after it is raised a little higher thanthe maximum TILT UP position.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem is reset.

OBL036329N


943

To keep items from shifting in the cargoarea, you can use the four rings locatedin the cargo area to attach the luggagenet.

LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-stretch the netting, allowing it topossibly snap back into your face.DO NOT use the luggage net whenthe strap has visible signs of wearor damage.

CAUTIONDo not put fragile, bulky or anexcessive quantity of items intoluggage net. They could be dam-aged.

E2BLB312C

3 95


Use the tonneau cover to hide itemsstored in the cargo area.

To use the rear shade of the tonneaucover, pull the handle backward andinsert the edges into the slots.

TONNEAU COVER (IF EQUIPPED)

E2BLB312A E2BLB313

WARNING• Do not place objects on the ton-

neau cover. Such objects may bethrown about inside the vehicleand possibly injure vehicle occu-pants during an accident or whenbraking.

• Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage compartment. It isdesigned for luggage only.

• Maintain the balance of the vehi-cle and locate the weight as farforward as possible.

CAUTIONSince the tonneau cover may bedamaged or malformed, do not putthe luggage on it when it is used.


963

The luggage center box is located underthe floor in cargo area. You can place afirst aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc.in the box for easy access.1. Grasp the handle on the edge of the

cover and lift it.2. Detach the hook from the cover and

hang the hook on the weather strip.When not in use, hang the hook on thebottom of the cover.

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload things on top of your vehicle.

LUGGAGE CENTER BOX

E2BLB312B 8BLA618B

ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION• If the vehicle is equipped with a

sunroof, be sure not to positioncargo onto the roof rack in such away that it could interfere withsunroof operation.

• When carrying cargo on the roofrack, take the necessary precau-tions to make sure the cargo doesnot damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects onthe roof rack, make sure they donot exceed the overall roof lengthor width.

3 97


WARNING • The following specification is the

maximum weight that can beloaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible on the roof rack andsecure the load firmly.

• The vehicle center of gravity willbe higher when items are loadedonto the roof rack. Avoid suddenstarts, braking, sharp turns,abrupt maneuvers or high speedsthat may result in loss of vehiclecontrol or rollover causing anaccident.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts, caused by passingvehicles or natural causes, cancause sudden upward pressureon items loaded on the roof rack.This is especially true when car-rying large, flat items such aswood panels or mattresses. Thiscould cause the items to fall offthe roof rack and cause damageto your vehicle or those aroundyou.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently before or while driving tomake sure the items on the roofrack are securely fastened.

CAUTION• If the vehicle has a sunroof, do

not position the roof rack loadsso that they could interfere withthe sunroof.

• Loading cargo or luggage abovespecification on the roof rack maydamage your vehicle.

ROOF 45 kg (100 lbs.)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED


983

ANTENNA

AntennaIf your vehicle has an audio system, afixed rod antenna is installed in your vehi-cle.This antenna can be removed from thevehicle when you wash your vehicle.

✽ NOTICE• Be sure to remove the antenna before

washing the car in an automatic carwash or it may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it isimportant that it is fully tightened toensure proper reception.

S2MS103019

3 99


The steering wheel audio remote controlbutton is installed to promote safe driv-ing.

✽ NOTICEDo not operate audio remote controlbuttons simultaneously.

MODEPress the MODE button to select Radio,CD (Compact Disc) or CDC (CompactDisc Changer, if equipped).Each press of the button changes thedisplay as follows:

VOLUME (▲/▼)• Press the VOLUME (▲) button to

increase volume.• Press the VOLUME (▼) button to

decease volume.

SEEK (▲/▼)If the SEEK (▲/▼) button is pressedfor 0.8 second or more, it will work asfollows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC mode

It will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

If the SEEK (▲/▼) button is pressedfor less than 0.8 second, it will work asfollows in each mode. (if equipped)

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATIONselect buttons.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons is described in the followingpages in this section.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

MODE

OBL063200N

RADIO(FM1➝FM2➝AM) ➝ CD ➝ CDC*

* : if equipped


1003

AUDIO SYSTEMUnderstanding Radio ReceptionYour vehicle's radio is able to receive AMand FM transmissions. To optimize theenjoyment of your vehicle's radio, youshould have a basic understanding ofhow radio signals are transmitted andreceived.

Radio signals (AM and FM) are broad-cast from the transmitter towers of radiostations in your vicinity. Your car radioreceives these signals through the radioantenna. These signals received aredirected to the audio system where theyare processed, amplified and then con-verted into sound that is emitted from theaudio system's speakers.

The quality of the audio reproduction thatyou hear depends on many factors. Oneimportant factor is signal strength. Aclear and strong signal results in clear,static-free sound. A weak signal normal-ly results in garbled sound with frequentbreaks and also static. The radio anten-na's ability to receive clear and strongradio signals depends on how close it isto the transmitting source and alsowhether there are physical obstructions(buildings or mountains) between thetransmitter and antenna. For example, ifyou are driving away from the transmit-ting source, you can expect gradual dete-rioration in the quality of the reception.

AM mode Amplitude Modulation (AM) broadcastsmakes use of low-frequency radio wavesto carry the signals to your car antenna.Low frequency radio waves typically trav-el further and better than higher frequen-cy radio waves (e.g. FM radio signals).This means that, compared to FM broad-casts, your car can travel further from anAM transmitting source before you expe-rience deterioration in signal strengthand clarity. One reason why AM radiosignals can travel further is because theycan 'bend' or 'go around' physicalobstructions in their path to your carradio antenna.

DCM06004

3 101


FM mode Frequency Modulation (FM) broadcastsmake use of high-frequency radio wavesto carry the signals to your car antenna.FM radio waves are best received in'clear line-of-sight' conditions. Unlike low-frequency radio waves that can 'bend'around physical obstructions like build-ings or mountains, FM radio signals areeasily blocked by physical obstructionslike buildings or mountains. Moreover,FM radio signals cannot travel as far asAM radio signals. Due to FM radio sig-nals' short transmission range, you willnotice that FM stations generally servelisteners within a restricted radius (typi-cally within one city).

The signal strength of a FM transmissionwill probably fade soon after you leavethe city the station is based in.This is dueto the technological limitations of the FMtransmission standard and does notmean that your radio is defective.

Comparing AM with FMDo remember that signal strength is onlyone factor affecting audio reproductionquality. AM broadcasts are in Mono modewhereas FM broadcasts are in Stereomode. Therefore, provided that the FMradio signal is strong and clear, the audioreproduction quality of an FM broadcastwill always sound brighter, fuller and rich-er than an AM broadcast. This is due tothe technological limitations of the AMtransmission standard and is does notmean that your radio is defective.

DCM06001 DCM06003


1023

Identifying your audio systemThe front panels of the respective audiosystem models are shown below. Use theidentifying callouts to confirm the modelof your audio system.

Model D446AM/FM tuner with single-disc CD player.Model D465AM/FM tuner with 6-disc changer CDplayer.

Controlling how your AudioSystem sounds Operating your Audio systemYour audio system comprises a factory-installed amplifier, an AM/FM digitaltuner (radio) and a CD player (single discor 6-disc changer). Use the CD player toplay discs encoded in the CD Audio,MP3, and WMA formats.Your audio system has 4 different typesof controls. These controls are usedeither independently or in combinationwith your audio system's radio, or CDplayer.

OBL03446A

OBL03465A

3 103


✽ NOTICEYour audio system's factory-installedamplifier is pre-configured for optimumperformance. You will not be able tomake any adjustments. If there is aproblem with the audio system's ampli-fier, please consult a professional audioengineer or the dealer where you pur-chased your vehicle.

1. Operational Controls:These controls are used to operate theentire audio system. (e.g. Power ON-OFFcontrol knob)

2. Sound Controls:Use these controls independently or incombination to control how the audiosystem sounds. (e.g. Volume control,Bass and Treble controls).The sound settings you make are appli-cable to all audio reproduction sources(radio or CD devices).

3. Radio controls:Use these controls to operate, navigatethe menu options and change settingswhen you are using the AM/FM digitaltuner.

4. CD controls:Use these controls to operate the CDplayer/changer, navigate the discs menuoptions and change playback settingswhen you are using the CD player.

✽ NOTICEA button or control may have differentfunctions depending on whether you areusing the Radio or CD player. For exam-ple, the RPT (Repeat) button can onlybe used in the CD mode.


1043

1.Power ON-OFF / Volume Control knob2.EQ button (Model D446) / Load button

(Model D465)3.CD EJECT Button4.Audio Control knob5.Sound properties6.AM, FM (Model D465), FM1 (Model

D446), FM2 (Model D446), CD (ModelD465) buttons

7.Sound equalizer and digital signal pro-cessing (Model D465) /CD button (Model D446)

Model shown is Model D465. The buttons on your audio system may differ.For details, see specific descriptions in the following sections.

OBL03465-0

Using Operational and Sound Controls

3 105


1. Power ON-OFF / Volume Controlknob

PowerTo operate your audio system, your igni-tion key must be in the "ACC" or "ON"position.Press the knob to switch on the audiosystem.The audio system resumes oper-ation in either the Radio or CD mode.Press the knob again to switch off theaudio system.

Volume Control KnobRotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and rotate the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. Loading CDsModel D446:Only one CD can be loaded at any onetime. If there is already a disc inserted inthe CD player, eject the disc before load-ing a new CD.To load a CD, gently insert the CD intothe CD slot. The CD will be automaticallyloaded. The CD player then starts to playthe CD.

✽ NOTICE• Do not force-load the CD as it will

damage the loading mechanism andcause your disc to jam in the player.

• If a CD cannot be loaded, check ifthere is already a disc in the playerand eject it first.

Model D465:Press the LOAD button to automaticallyswitch the audio system on in CD playermode.Follow the instructions on the LCDscreen to load and play your CDs.

✽ NOTICETo load more than 1 CD (maximum of6), press and hold the load button formore than 2 seconds. The disc numberindicator will flash to indicate howmany CDs you can still load.


1063

3. CD EJECT ( ) ButtonModel D446:Press the button once to eject the CDfrom the CD player.

Model D465Press the button once to eject thelast CD played.Press and hold button for more than2 seconds to eject all the CDs in thechanger in sequence beginning with thelast CD played.

✽ NOTICEYou can eject discs even if the audio sys-tem is switched off.

4. Audio Control knobUse the audio control knob to changehow music playback sounds and also tocontrol how sound is distributed to thespeaker system.

Sound properties

Press the knob repeatedly to display thecorresponding audio control settings(Bass, Middle, Treble, Fader, Balance).The LCD screen displays the audio con-trol settings in sequence. Once the audiocontrol setting you want is displayed,rotate the knob clockwise/anti-clock-wise to change the level of that audiosetting.

BassIncreases/decreases Bass response ofaudio reproductionMiddleIncreases/decreases Mid-rangeresponse of audio reproductionTrebleIncreases/decreases Treble response ofaudio reproductionFaderSets front/rear balance level for yourspeaker systemBalanceSets left/right balance level for yourspeaker system

✽ NOTICETo return all audio control settings tothe default (centered) positions, pressand hold the audio control knob formore than 2 seconds. An audible beepindicates that all audio controls havebeen returned to the default setting.

3 107


5. AM, FM, FM1, FM2, CD buttonsModel D446: AM, FM1, FM2, CDModel D465: AM, FM, CDUse the input source selector buttons toselect/switch operation modes. Press theAM band selector button, FM/FM1/FM2band selector button(s) or CD or buttonto resume operation in the correspondingmode.Pressing any of these buttons automati-cally switches the audio system on.The LCD screen displays either the radiofrequency you are tuned into or the trackcurrently played back.

✽ NOTICE• Remember that station Presets (1-6)

stored in FM1 mode can only beaccessed in FM1 mode. Similarly,FM2 presets can only be accessed inFM2 mode.

• For Model D465: Press the FM band selector buttonrepeatedly to switch between the FM1and FM2 modes.

6. Sound equalizer and digital signalprocessing

Both Model D446 and Model D465: EQbutton

EQ button:Press the EQ button repeatedly to selectthe sound equalizer setting you want.

The 6 settings are: ROCK, POP, JAZZ,CLASSIC, TALK and equalizer off. If noicon is displayed in the LCD screen, theequalizer is switched off.

The 5 preset equalizer settings havebeen optimized for the 5 common genresof music. For example, the ROCK settingenhances bass reproduction with rockmusic whereas the CLASSIC settingenhances the clarity of string instrumentsduring audio reproduction of classicalmusic. You may want to experiment withthe different settings to confirm your per-sonal preferences.

✽ NOTICEIf you store a station Preset (1~6) with aspecific equalizer setting, that setting isautomatically used across other stationspreset.


1083

1. SCAN button2. PRESET SCAN function3. SEEK and buttons4. Tuning Knob5. Station Preset buttons (1~6) 6. Using Presets

OBL03465-1

Using FM / AM Tuner (Radio) Controls

The functions of the buttons and controls described below are only applicable when you select the Radio mode by pressing the AM or FMselector buttons (models D465), or, AM, FM1 or FM2 selector buttons (model D446).

Model shown is Model D465. The buttons on your audio system may differ.For details, see specific descriptions in the following section.

3 109


1. SCAN buttonFrequency band scan functionPress the SCAN button for the tuner toscan for radio signals in the selected fre-quency band (AM or FM). Once the tunerlocks onto the signal of a transmittingstation, it plays that station for 5 secondsbefore scanning for the next availablestation in the selected frequency band.If you want to keep listening to a particu-lar station and want to stop the scanning,press the SCAN button again.

This function is useful for providing youwith a good overview of all the radio sta-tions within range of your tuner.

2. PRESET SCAN functionPress and hold the SCAN button formore than 2 seconds. Each preset radiostations will be automatically played for 5seconds. If you want to keep listening toa particular preset station and want tostop the scanning, press the SCAN but-ton again.

3. SEEK and buttonsAutomatic Channel Selection functionPress the and buttons to scan upand down the frequency range for thenext available radio station and automat-ically lock on to that frequency.The LCD screen displays the frequencyof the radio station transmitting a clearand strong signal.Use this function to search for a radiostation you want. If you like a particularstation, you can store it as one of 6Presets using the Preset buttons below.

✽ NOTICEThis function is not effective if you areexperiencing poor reception in yourvicinity.

4. Tuning KnobManual Channel SelectionRotate the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to manually advance up ordown the frequency range. The tuningknob also gives you fine-grain controlwhich you can use to manually fine-tuneyour frequency selection. This is useful ifyou are searching for a radio signalwhich is not strong enough for you to usethe Automatic Channel Selection func-tion

✽ NOTICEThe speed at which you advance up ordown the frequency range depends onhow fast you turn the knob.


1103

5. Station Preset buttons (1~6) There are 6 Station Preset buttons whichyou can use to store the frequencies ofyour 6 favorite radio stations. Saving astation as a preset gives you one-touchaccess to the station you want.Remember that the 6 presets stationsyou store are for the specific radio bandmode you are in. That means that youcan store up to 6 stations in AM mode, 6in FM1 mode, and 6 in FM2 mode. Thismeans that you can store up to 18 of yourfavorite stations in the preset memory.

✽ NOTICE• To switch between FM1 and FM2

mode:Use the FM1 and FM2 buttons (forModel D446)Press the FM button to switchbetween FM1 and FM2 modes (ForModel D465)

• Remember that if you store a stationas preset 1 in FM2 mode, you mustfirst select FM2 mode before you canuse that preset button.

• This function is not effective if you areexperiencing poor reception in yourvicinity.

6. Using PresetsTo save a radio station as a preset:1.Take note of the band selection dis-

played on the LCD screen (AM, FM1 orFM2)

2.Tune in to the radio station you wantusing either the SEEK UP and DOWNbuttons or the Tuning Knob.

3.Choose the Preset button (1~6) youwant to use to store the radio station.

4.Press and hold the Preset button formore than 2 seconds.The system beeps to indicate that ithas saved the new station and displaysthe frequency and preset number onthe LCD screen.

✽ NOTICESaving a new station erases the previoussetting saved in that preset.

To tune in to a preset station:1.Select the band (AM, FM1 or FM2) you

want using the band selector buttons.2.Press the preset button corresponding

to the radio station you want.The system automatically jumps to thepreset station. The frequency and pre-set number is displayed on the LCDscreen.

Buttons not in use in Radio mode:The following buttons and functions arenot used in Radio mode.

• REW button• FF button• RPT button• RDM button• MARK button• NFO button

3 111


1. SCAN button2. Track UP and DOWN buttons 3. CD selector buttons (1~6) 4. Rewind REW and Fast Forward FF

buttons5. Dir and buttons (MP3 and

WMA discs)6. File Search Knob7. RPT, RDM, MARK & INFO buttons

OBL03465-0

The functions of the buttons and controls described below are only applicable when you select the CD mode by pressing the CD selector button(for both Model D446 and Model D465).

Using CD player Controls

Model shown is D465. The buttons on your audio system may differ.For details, see specific descriptions in the following section.


1123

1. SCAN buttonDisc Scan functionModel D446:

During CD playback, press the SCANbutton to play the first 10 seconds (pre-view) of all tracks on the current CD.

Model D465:

To preview the first track of all the CDs inthe CD changer, press and hold theSCAN button for more than 2 seconds.

Once you hear a track you want, pressthe SCAN button again to resume nor-mal playback.

2. Track UP and DOWN but-tons

During CD playback, press the andbuttons to select and play the

next or previous track on the current disc.The LCD screen displays the track num-ber as you press the buttons. You canpress the button several times to selectthe track you want.

3. CD selector buttons (1~6) Model D446:The CD selector buttons are not usedwith Model D446.

Model D465:Press the CD selector button correspon-ding to the CD you want. The CD playerautomatically interrupts playback andloads the selected CD.

✽ NOTICEIf no CD is loaded in the selected posi-tion, the LCD screen displays the NoDisc indicator.

4. Rewind REW and Fast Forward FFbuttons

During CD playback, press and hold theREW or FF buttons to rewind or fast-for-ward playback of the current track. TheLCD screen displays the elapsed time ofthe track you are rewinding or fast-for-warding.Release the REW or FF button when youhave reached the point you want.Playback resumes automatically at theselected point.

5. Dir and buttons (MP3 andWMA discs)

During MP3/WMA CD playback, pressthe DIR or buttons to switch to thenext or previous directory on the CD. TheLCD screen displays the name of thedirectory you have switched to. You canpress the button several times to searchfor the directory you want.The directoriesare displayed in sequence (i.e. ascend-ing or descending alphabetical order).To access the directory displayed, pressthe File Search knob to ENTER yourselection.

✽ NOTICEThe Directory UP and DOWN buttonscan only be used when you are playing aCD which has organized its tracks in theform of directories. Normally, only MP3or WMA CDs will contain a directorytree which you can navigate using thesebuttons.

3 113


6. File Search KnobRotate the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to manually advance up ordown the track list of the CD currentlyplayed. This function allows you to quick-ly scroll to a specific track number. It isespecially useful if you are playing a MP3or WMA CD which contains many direc-tories and tracks. The LCD screen dis-plays the track number you have scrolledto.Once the track number you want is dis-played, press the File Search knob toENTER your selection and begin play-back of the selected track.

✽ NOTICEYou must push the File Search knob toselect the track for playback. Otherwise,the CD player will not jump to the tracknumber displayed in the number count-er. Use the File Search knob and the DIR

and buttons in together to quick-ly search for a track you want on a MP3CD with many directories and tracks.

7. RPT, RDM, MARK & INFO buttons These buttons correspond to the Repeat,Random Playback, Marklist and DiscInformation functions.Turn to the next section of your handbookfor detailed instructions.

Playing CDs, MP3 and WMA discs1. Loading CDsModel D446:Only one CD can be loaded at any onetime. If there is already a disc inserted inthe CD player, eject the disc before load-ing a new CD.

To load a CD, gently insert the CD intothe CD slot. The CD will be automaticallyloaded. The CD player then starts to playthe CD.

✽ NOTICE• Do not force-load the CD as it will

damage the loading mechanism andcause your disc to jam in the player.

• If a CD cannot be loaded, check ifthere is already a disc in the playerand eject it first.Only one CD can be loaded at any onetime.


1143

Model D465You can load one or more CDs (maxi-mum of 6) into the CD changer throughthe CD loading slot. To do so:1.Press the Load button to load 1 CD.

The LCD screen displays the numberassigned to the CD as a flashing num-ber. For example, if the CD changercurrently contains 4 CDs, the loadeddisc will be CD 5.ORPress and hold the Load button formore than 2 seconds to load more than1 CD.The LCD screen displays empty slotsin the CD changer as flashing num-bers.

2.The LCD screen displays the instruc-tions for loading one or more CDs.Follow the instructions - Wait, InsertCD1, Loading CD 1, Reading CD1,…Reading CD6.

3.Once you have finished loading the CDor CDs, the CD player automaticallyplays the first track of the last CDloaded.If the audio system was in Radio modewhile you were loading the CDs, itautomatically switches to CD playermode.

✽ NOTICEThe LCD screen displays Changer Fullto indicate that the CD changer is full.Do not try to load any other disc.

2. Ejecting CDsModel D446Press the CD EJECT ( ) button toeject the CD in the CD player.

Model D465Press the button once to eject thelast CD played.Press and hold button for more than2 seconds to eject all the CDs in thechanger in sequence beginning with thelast CD played.

✽ NOTICEYou can eject discs without switching onthe audio system using the Power ON-OFF knob.

To eject 1 CD:Press the EJECT button once.If you are playing a CD, playback willautomatically switch to the next availableCD.The LCD screen displays the number ofthe CD ejected as a flashing number.If there are no other disc left in the CDchanger, the audio system automaticallyswitches to Radio mode and resumeswith the last channel or frequency select-ed.ORIf the audio system is in Radio mode, thelast CD played will be ejected.The LCD screen displays the number ofthe CD ejected as a flashing number.To eject all CDs:Press and hold the EJECT button formore than 2 seconds to eject all the CDsin the CD changer.The LCD screen displays the CDs beingejected in the CD changer as flashingnumbers. The CDs are ejected insequence. Follow the instructions dis-played on the LCD screen to remove allCDs from the changer.

3 115


✽ NOTICEIf the audio system is in Radio mode,you can eject CDs without interruptingthe operation of the radio.

3. Selecting a disc to playModel D446Only the CD loaded in the player can beplayed.

Model D465You can select any disc loaded in the CDchanger for playback.

To do so:Press the corresponding CD selectorbutton (1~6).The CD changer automatically loads theselected CD and begins playback of thefirst track.The LCD screen displays the selectedCD as a flashing number.

4. Selecting and playing tracks(songs)

To select tracks, you can use one of 3methods:

Method 1:Press the Track Up or Track Down but-ton repeatedly until you find the track youwant.

Method 2:Rotate the File Search knob to scroll tothe track you want. The number counterin the LCD screen shows you the tracknumber.Press the File Search knob to ENTERyour selection and begin playback.

Method 3 (only for MP3 and WMACDs):Press the DIR Up or Down buttonsrepeatedly to switch to the directory youwant on the CD.The LCD screen displays the name ofthe directory you have switched to.

Rotate the File Search knob to scroll tothe track you want in the selected direc-tory. The number counter in the LCDscreen shows you the track number.Press the File Search knob to ENTERyour selection and begin playback.


1163

5. Using the Repeat function (RPTbutton)

To repeat playback of the currenttrack:Press the RPT button once. The LCDscreen displays RPT to indicate that it isin REPEAT mode. Playback of the cur-rent track will be repeated.Press the RPT button again to resumenormal playback. The RPT indicator iscleared.

To repeat playback of all tracks on thecurrent CD/File Directory:Press and hold the RPT button for morethan 2 seconds. The LCD screen dis-plays RPT ALL to indicate that it is inREPEAT ALL mode. The tracks of thecurrent audio CD or the tracks in the cur-rent MP3 file directory will be repeated.Press the RPT button again to resumenormal playback. The RPT ALL indicatoris cleared.

6. Using the Random playback func-tion (RDM button)

For random playback in audio CDs(also applies to current MP3 file direc-tory):Press the RDM button once. The LCDscreen displays RDM to indicate that it isin RANDOM mode. Tracks on the currentaudio CD/MP3 directory will be randomlyselected and played.Press the RDM button again to resumenormal playback. The RDM indicator iscleared. Normal playback resumes.

For random playback of all tracks on aCD (only for MP3 and WMA CDs):Press and hold the RDM button for morethan 2 seconds. The LCD screen dis-plays RDM ALL to indicate that it is inRANDOM ALL mode. Tracks from alldirectories in the MP3/WMA CD will berandomly selected and played.Press the RDM button again to resumenormal playback.The RDM ALL indicatoris cleared.

7. Using the Bookmark function(MARK button)

The Bookmark function allows you toselect and add up to 20 tracks from anyCD in the CD changer to a playlist (mark-list). You can then play the tracks on theplaylist whenever you want.

Adding tracks to the playlist (mark-list):1.Play the track you want.2.Press and hold the MARK button for

more than 2 seconds to add the cur-rent track to the playlist (marklist). TheLCD screen displays MARK to indicatethat the track has been added to theplaylist (marklist).

3.Repeat steps 1 & 2 to add more tracksto the marklist (maximum of 20 book-marks.)

3 117


Playing tracks on the playlist (mark-list):1.Press the MARK button once. The

LCD screen displays MARK to indicatethat it is in bookmark mode and auto-matically begins playback of the trackssaved on the playlist (marklist) insequence.

2.Press the MARK button again toresume normal playback. The MARKindicator is cleared. Normal playbackresumes.

Deleting tracks from the playlist(marklist):1.Press the MARK button once. The


2.Select the track you want to remove.(See Selecting and playing tracks(songs))

3.Press and hold the MARK button formore than 2 seconds. The LCD screendisplays TRACK DELETED to confirmthat the bookmark has been deleted.

Deleting all tracks from the playlist(marklist):1.Press the MARK button once. The


2.Press and hold the MARK button formore than 4 seconds. The LCD screendisplays MARKLIST EMPTY to con-firm that all the bookmarks in theplaylist (marklist) have been deleted.

✽ NOTICEIf rotate the File Search knob in non-bookmark mode, LCD screen shall dis-play MARK indicator for the trackssaved on the playlist (marklist).

8. Using the file information function*(INFO button)

* This function can only be used withMP3/WMA tracks.

Press the INFO button repeatedly to dis-play information about the track. TheLCD screen displays the File Name,Artiste Name and Song Title insequence.

✽ NOTICEThe information (File Name, ArtisteName and Song Title) available for dis-play depends on the information theMP3/WMA file was encoded with. If therelevant information was not includedwhen the file was encoded, you will notbe able to see it.


1183

Using External Controls1. The Dimmer controlThe Dimmer control setting determinesthe brightness of the entire vehicle's dis-plays.Turn the scroll wheel up or down toincrease or decrease the brightness ofthe vehicle's instrument panels, backlitdisplays and the audio system's LCDscreen and backlit controls.

2. Steering wheel audio controlsSteering wheel-mounted audio controlsallow you to make adjustments to themost frequently used audio controls with-out taking your eyes off the road.

Control Function

MODE button

Press this button to switch between the FM1/FM2/AM/CD modes.Check the LCD screen display to confirm if you have selected themode you want.✽ NOTICEThe modes available depend on the model of your audio.

Press and hold to decrease (▼) or increase (▲) the volume.

IN RADIO MODE :Press and release ▲ and ▼to switch to the next or previous presetstation. For example, to switch from preset station 1 to preset station3, press ▲ twice.Press and hold (about 1 second) ▲ and ▼ to scan up and down thefrequency range for the next available radio station and automatical-ly lock on to that frequency.IN CD MODE :During CD playback, press and release ▼ and ▲ to select and playthe previous or next track on the disc. The LCD screen displays thetrack number as you press the buttons.You can press the button sev-eral times to select the track you want.Press and hold (about 1 second) ▲ and ▼ to:·• Fast-Forward or Rewind the current track (Model D446/Model

D465 (Only 1 disc inserted))·

• Select and play the next or previous disc in the CD changer (ModelD465 (More than 1 disc inserted))

✽ NOTICEWhether you are able to select, play, fast-forward or rewind theprevious or next title/chapter/track on the disc depends on thecontents encoded on your disc.

VOLUME up/down rocker switch

SEEK up/down button

3 119


Troubleshooting Poor RadioReceptionProblem:Fading Signals / Interference /Increased interference/ Static

FM Broadcasts - The further you moveaway from the radio station's transmittingsource (normally within a city or town),the weaker the signal will be. You mightexperience abrupt breaks in transmis-sion, garbled sound and also static eventhough your radio remains tuned to thesame frequency.

AM Broadcasts - Even though AM radiosignals travel further and stronger thanFM radio signals, weather or terrain con-ditions might adversely affect your radio'sability to receive the signals.

Solution:Use your audio system's Scan function toautomatically search for and selectanother radio station with good signalstrength.

Problem:High-pitched static, distortion or a'fluttering' sound (Multi-PathCancellation)

Radio stations transmitting on frequen-cies that are very close to each othermay cause distortion or 'fluttering'. Thiseffect is known as Multi-PathCancellation. This normally occurs whenyour tuner is receiving a station's trans-mission as both direct and 'reflected'radio signals or when your tuner receivessignals from more than 1 radio stationtransmitting on frequencies that are veryclose to each other.

Solution:If the problem is caused by a temporarydeterioration in the signal strength of onestation's transmission, reduce the levelsof your audio system's Treble and Middlesettings to suppress the sound. If theproblem is caused by interference fromanother station, select another radio sta-tion with good and clear signal strength.

Problem:Interference from another FM radiobroadcast ('station-swapping')

FM radio stations transmit on frequen-cies that are very close to each other onthe FM band. When you travel furtherand further away from a transmittingsource, the signal strength of that trans-mission decreases. Your radio's ability to'lock' on to that specific frequency isaffected. This is because your radio isdesigned to lock on to the strongest sig-nal it can detect. Therefore, another radiostation broadcasting on a frequency veryclose to your original station could 'inter-fere' with your reception and you mightstart to hear the broadcast of the secondstation. You will normally experience thiswhen you are moving away from a weaksignal and towards a stronger one.


1203

Solution:Use your audio system's Scan function toautomatically search for and selectanother radio station with good signalstrength.

Problem:Interference caused by cellularphones and 2-way radios

Operating cellular phones and 2-wayradios inside or within close proximity ofyour car may interfere with your radioreception. You may hear static, clicks,sounds or other types of white noise fromyour speakers.

Solution:Cease operation of cellular phone or 2-way radios. Alternatively, move awayfrom your car. The interference to yourradio reception should be reduced.

Caring for your Audio SystemYour audio system contains sophisticat-ed electronics and precision-engineeredparts and components that are not user-serviceable. To ensure trouble-free oper-ation, please observe the following pre-cautions:

1. General Use and OperationYour audio system contains precisionelectronic components that are tempera-ture-, moisture-, and static-sensitive. Youshould take care not to subject youraudio system to extremes in tempera-tures or moisture. For example, if youhave parked your car in the sun, the inte-rior of the car could be very hot. Ventilatethe car to reduce the interior temperaturebefore trying to operate the audio sys-tem.Never try to insert anything other thanproperly formatted CDs into the CD play-er. Foreign objects can cause the deli-cate mechanism to jam and render yourCD player unusable.You must also followthe instructions displayed on your audiosystem's LCD screen.For example, if your audio system is dis-playing "Wait", you should never try toforce-load a CD into the CD player.

WARNING• Your car's electrical systems con-

tain sensitive electronics compo-nents. Interference from cellularphones, 2-way radios and othertransmitting devices couldadversely affect the safe opera-tion of your vehicle. This couldcompromise the safety of boththe driver and other passengersin the vehicle.

• When using cellular phones, 2-way radios and other transmittingdevices in your vehicle, alwaysuse a separate external antenna.For restrictions on the use ofcommunications and transmittingdevices, please consult the rele-vant product documentation.

• Local laws may prohibit the useof cellular phones while driving. Ifyou need to make or answer a callwhile driving, please stop thevehicle in a safe place before pro-ceeding.

3 121


2. Your audio system's CD playerYour audio system includes a CD playerthat allows you to play audio CDs, MP3and WMA CDs. To ensure trouble-freeoperation, please observe the followingprecautions:

• Caring for your CDs (Audio, MP3and WMA discs)- Always hold and carry a CD by its

edges to prevent scratching the disc.Fingerprints or dirt on the disc sur-face may cause skips or other errorsduring playback

- If your CDs become dirty, clean it witha mild detergent and water and wipeit dry with a soft, lint-free cloth.

- Never clean your CDs using corrosiveor volatile cleaning agents such asbenzene, thinner or cleaning spraysmeant for vinyl records.

• CD formatsWhether or not a CD can be played inyour CD player depends on how theinformation on the CD has beenencoded. Some CDs may be incom-patible with your CD player and cannotbe played back. For example, sometypes of copy-protected audio CDswhich do not comply with the industry-standard Red Book format may not beplayed back. This does not indicate afault with your CD player. Please verifythat the encoding on your CD is com-patible with your CD player. Consult theCD's documentation for more details.

CAUTION• The creation and use of MP3

music files are governed by copy-right legislation that may be spe-cific to the country/district youreside in.

• Specific copyrights attached toworks may also govern their pos-session and use. Please observeall applicable copyright laws inthe operation and use of youraudio system’s CD player.

4

Ignition switch / 4-2

Starting the engine / 4-4

Automatic transmission / 4-5

Four wheel drive (4WD) / 4-10

Limited slip differential / 4-19

Brake system / 4-20

Steering wheel / 4-25

Cruise control system / 4-27

Electronic stability control / 4-30

Rear parking assist system / 4-33

Instrument cluster / 4-36

Gauges / 4-37

Warnings and indicators / 4-39

Multi-meter / 4-45

Lighting / 4-51

Wipers and washers / 4-54

Defroster / 4-57

Hazard warning flasher / 4-58

Manual climate control system / 4-59

Automatic climate control system / 4-66

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-75



24

Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)Whenever a door is opened, the ignitionswitch will be illuminated for your con-venience, provided the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.The light will go offapproximately 30 seconds after closingthe door or when the ignition switch isturned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock

Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position (Type A) and turn thekey toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

ON

The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON if theengine is not running to prevent batterydischarge.

IGNITION SWITCH

PUSH

LOC

K

ACC ON

STAR

T

E2BLA401A 1KMA3013

1KMB3013

Type A

Type B

4 3


START

Turn the ignition key to the START posi-tion to start the engine. The engine willcrank until you release the key; then itreturns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.

✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced in turning theignition key, turn the steering wheelright and left to release the tension andthen turn the key.

Automatic transmissionWhen turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, the shift lever must be inthe P (Park) position.

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving. This would result in lossof directional control and brakingfunction, which could cause animmediate accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris engaged in 1st gear for manualtransmission or P (Park) for auto-matic transmission, set the park-ing brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and sud-den vehicle movement may occurif these precautions are nottaken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is in motion. The pres-ence of your hand or arm in thisarea could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol, an accident and seriousbodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to anaccident.


44

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Automatic Transmission - Place thetransmission shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below 0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days, letthe engine warm up without depress-ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressingthe accelerator.

The starter will not operate if:Automatic Transmission - the shift leveris NOT in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

CAUTION - StallIf the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter for morethan 10 seconds. If the engine stallsor fails to start, wait 5 to 10 secondsbefore re-engaging the starter.Excessive or improper use of thestarter may damage it.

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, skiboots,etc.) may interfere with yourability to use the brake and acceler-ator pedal, and the clutch pedal (ifequipped).

4 5


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

OBL046900N

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports modeAutomatic mode

The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

Lock release button prevents shift lever movementwithout first depressing the button.


64

Automatic transmission operationAll normal forward driving is done withthe shift lever in the D (Drive) position.To move the shift lever from the P (Park)position, the brake pedal must bedepressed and the lock release buttonmust be depressed.

For smooth operation, depress the brakepedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to aforward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatictransmission

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift lever isin the P (PARK) position; then setthe parking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifthese precautions are not followedin the order identified.

OBL046900

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Automaticmode

Sports mode

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your trans-

mission, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade, donot hold the vehicle stationarywith engine power. Use the serv-ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P(Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.

4 7


Transmission rangesP (park)Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into P. This position locks thetransmission and prevents the frontwheels from rotating.

R (reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (neutral)The wheels and transmission are notlocked. The vehicle will roll freely even onthe slightest incline unless the parkingbrake or service brakes are applied.

D (drive)This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transmission will automaticallyshift through a 4-gear sequence, provid-ing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time the trans-mission will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear.

(Continued)• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position. Setthe parking brake fully, shut theengine off and take the key withyou. Unexpected and suddenvehicle movement can occur ifyou do not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattended ina vehicle.

WARNING - Automatictransmission

• Shifting into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion will cause thedrive wheels to lock which willcause you to lose control of thevehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.Always make sure the shift leveris latched in the P (Park) positionso that it cannot be moved unlessthe lock release button is pushedin, AND set the parking brakefully.

(Continued)

CAUTIONThe transmission may be damagedif you shift into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransmission if you shift into Rwhile the vehicle is in motion.


84

Sports modeWhether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the “D” positioninto the manual gate. To return to “D”range operation, push the shift lever backinto the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. The sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

Snow mode

When taking off from a standstill on aslippery road, push the shift lever forwardinto the +(up) position. This causes thetransmission to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth driving on aslippery road.Push the shift lever to the -(down) side toshift back to the 1st gear.

✽ NOTICE• Upshifts take place automatically in

sports mode. However, the drivermust execute upshifts in accordancewith road conditions, taking care tokeep the engine speed below the redzone because upshifts take place at thehigher engine rpm.

• In sports mode, only the four forwardgears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the “R” or “P” position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpmapproaches the red zone shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.

✽ NOTICEIn the sport mode, if you push the leverto shift and no shift occurs, the system isacting to protect your safety and thevehicle.

E4BLA402C

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Automaticmode

Sports mode

4 9


Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2 (Second Gear) whilein Sport mode will help prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards.

Shift lock systemFor your safety, the AutomaticTransmission has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transmissionout of P (Park) unless the brake pedal isdepressed.To shift the transmission out of P (Park):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ACC or ON position.3. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.When the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition, the transmission cannot beshifted from P (Park).If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringnoise near the shift lever may be heard.This is a normal condition.

Ignition key interlock systemThe ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position. If the ignition switch is in anyother position, the key cannot beremoved.


104

For safe four-wheel drive opera-tion• Your vehicle allows you to drive in on-

road and off-road conditions.• However, do not try to drive in deep

standing water, mud, or over steephills.

• When you are driving up or down hillsdrive as close to straight up and downthe hill as possible. Use extreme cau-tion in going up or down steep hills,since you may flip your vehicle overdepending on the grade, terrain andwater/mud conditions.

• You must learn how to corner in a 4WDvehicle as soon as possible. Do notrely on your experience in convention-al 2WD vehicles in choosing safe cor-nering speed. You must drive moreslowly.

• Drive off-road carefully because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar with theoff-road conditions you are going todrive before you start.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Four wheeldrive

Driving across the contour of steephills can be extremely dangerous.This danger can come from slightchanges in the wheel angle whichcan destabilize the vehicle or, evenif the vehicle is maintaining stabili-ty under power, it can lose that sta-bility if the vehicle stops its forwardmotion. Your vehicle may roll overwithout warning and without timefor you to correct a mistake thatcould cause serious injury or death.

WARNINGReduce speed when you turn cor-ners. The center of gravity of 4WDvehicles is higher than that of con-ventional 2WD vehicles, makingthem more likely to roll over whenyou turn corners too fast.

WARNINGDo not grab inside of the steeringwheel when you are driving off-road. Your arm may be hurt by asudden steering maneuver or fromsteering wheel rebound due toimpact with objects on the ground.This may cause you to lose steeringwheel control.

4 11


• Always hold the steering wheel firmlywhen you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers are wearingseat belts.

• Do not drive in water if the level is high-er than the bottom of the vehicle.

• Check your brake condition once youare out of mud or water. Press thebrake pedal several times as you moveslowly until you feel normal brakingforces return.

• Shorten your scheduled maintenanceinterval if you drive in off-road condi-tions such as sand, mud or water (see“Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index).Always wash your car thoroughly.

Full-time 4WD operation (if equipped)When 4WD is selected with the transfershift knob, the vehicle will switch to 4WDoperation after a few seconds.

WARNINGIf you are driving too fast in water,the water spray can get into theengine compartment and wet theignition system, causing your vehi-cle a sudden stop. If this happensand your vehicle is in a tilted posi-tion, your vehicle may roll over.

WARNINGIf you are driving in heavy wind, thevehicle's higher center of gravitydecreases your steering controlcapacity and requires you to drivemore slowly.

LOW

AUTO

E2BLA411B


124

✽ NOTICEWhen the vehicle shifts into 4WD mode,a slight mechanical sound and vibrationmay be felt and does not indicate a prob-lem with the system.

To avoid shift shock, when the vehicle isstopped and you make a transfer caseshift using the transfer shift knob, waituntil the corresponding indicator light inthe instrument cluster illuminates beforedriving.

Knob positionThis is used to set different positions.

AUTO

Full power delivered to front and rearaxle for increased traction. Use this modefor normal on-road driving.The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) willbe turned off after blinking for a few sec-onds to remind you that you are in theAUTO mode.

LOW

Full power to both axles, including alower gear ratio for low speed applica-tions that require extra power such aswet pavement, snow-covered roadsand/or off-road.LOW Mode is not recommended on drypavement.The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) willbe turned on after blinking for a few sec-onds to remind you that you are in theLOW mode.

Transfer shift knob operationAUTO ↔ LOW

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual

transmission) or put the shift lever intoN (Neutral) position (Automatic trans-mission).

3. AUTO ➝ LOW: Turn the transfer shift knob to LOWmode.LOW ➝ AUTO: Turn the transfer shift knob to AUTOmode.

4. Before releasing the clutch pedal(Manual transmission) or shifting toother ranges from N (Automatic trans-mission), wait for the correspondingindicator light in the instrument clusterto go ON or OFF.

4WDLOW

4WDLOW

CAUTIONIf the vehicle moves while the trans-fer shift is in process, the gearboxmay be damaged.

4 13


Part-time 4WD operation (if equipped)You can send your engine's drivingpower to all front and rear wheels formaximum power.Four-wheel drive is useful when youdrive in snow, mud, ice or sand wheregood traction is required, or when yourwheels lose traction using two-wheeldrive.

When 4WD is selected with the transfershift knob, the vehicle will switch to 4WDoperation after a few seconds.

✽ NOTICEWhen the vehicle shifts into 4WD mode,a slight mechanical sound and vibrationmay be felt and does not indicate a prob-lem with the system.

To avoid shift shock, when the vehicle isstopped and you make a transfer caseshift using the transfer shift knob, waituntil the corresponding indicator light inthe instrument cluster illuminates beforedriving.

✽ NOTICE• Do not select four wheel drive on flat

and normal roads.• Four-wheel driving on flat roads for a

long period causes poor fuel economyand noise and it also causes tires towear faster.

• Four-wheel driving on flat and nor-mal roads can result in a severe bind-ing and chattering condition whenturning the steering wheel.

• Four-wheel driving on flat roads for along period can also cause the differ-ential oil temperature to increase,resulting in damage to parts in thepower train.

OBL046901N


144

Knob positionThis is used to set different positions.

2HI (Rear-wheel drive)

This mode is used, when driving on nor-mal roads and highway.

4HI (High-range 4-wheel drive)

This mode is used, when driving off-roads, wet or snow covered roads withnormal speed.The 4WD indicator light ( ) will beturned on to remind you that you are inthe 4HI mode.

4LO (Low-range 4-wheel drive)

Use 4LO for climbing or descending hills,off-roads driving and towing the vehicle,especially when increased power isrequired.The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) willbe turned on to remind you that you arein the 4LO mode.

Transfer shift knob operationBy turning the transfer knob (4HI, 4LO),both front and rear axles are engaged.This improves the traction characteristic.

2HI ➝ 4HI

Turn the transfer knob from the 2HI modeto 4HI mode at speed below 80 km/h (50mph).It is not necessary to depress the clutchpedal or put the shift lever into N(Neutral) position (Manual transmission)or put the shift lever into N (Neutral) posi-tion (Automatic transmission).Perform this operation when drivingstraight. There will be a few seconds oftime delay before come into 4HI modewhen you shift the knob to 4 HI from 2HI.

4HI ➝ 2HI

Turn the transfer knob from the 4HI modeto the 2HI mode at speed below 80 km/h(50 mph). It is not necessary to depressthe clutch pedal (Manual transmission) orput the shift lever into N (Neutral)(Automatic transmission). Perform thisoperation when driving straight.If the transfer mode does not shift into2HI mode when you turn the transferknob to 2HI, drive straight ahead withaccelerating or decelerating, or drive inreverse.

4WDLOW

4 15


4HI ↔ 4LO

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Depress the clutch pedal for the man-

ual transmission or put the shift leverinto N (Neutral) for the automatictransmission.

3. 4HI ➝ 4LO: Select the 4LO mode.4LO ➝ 4HI: Select the 4HI mode.

4. Before releasing the clutch pedal(Manual transmission) or shifting toother ranges from N range (Automatictransmission), wait for correspondingindicator light turns on or off in thecluster.

For safe four-wheel drive opera-tion• Your vehicle allows you to drive in on-

road and off-road conditions.• However, do not try to drive in deep

standing water, mud, or over steephills.

• When you are driving up or down hills,drive as close to straight up and downthe hills as possible. Use extreme cau-tion in going up or down steep hills,since you can flip your vehicle overdepending on the grade, terrain andwater/mud conditions.

• Drive off-road carefully because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar with theoff-road conditions you are going todrive before you start.

CAUTIONIf the vehicle moves while the trans-fer shift is in process, the gearboxmay be damaged.

WARNING - Four-wheeldriving

The conditions on-road or off-roadthat demand four-wheel drive meanall functions of your vehicle areexposed to more extreme stressthan under highway conditions.Slow down, look ahead, and beready for sudden changes in thecomposition and traction of the sur-face under your tires. If you haveany doubt about the safety of theconditions you are facing, stop andconsider the best way to proceed.Do not exceed the ability of yourselfor your vehicle to operate safely.

HILL1/HILL2

Approach Hill StraightUp/Down

Do not Approach atAngle


164

• You must learn how to corner in a 4WDvehicle as soon as possible. Do not relyon your experience in conventional2WD vehicles in choosing a safe cor-nering speed. You must drive moreslowly.

• Always hold the steering wheel firmlywhen you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers are wearingseat belts.

WARNING - Steep hillsDriving across the contour of steephills can be extremely dangerous.This danger can come from slightchanges in the hill angle which candestabilize the vehicle. Even if thevehicle is maintaining stabilityunder power, it can lose that stabil-ity if the vehicle stops its forwardmotion. Your vehicle may roll overwithout warning and without timefor you to correct a mistake thatcould cause serious injury or death.

WARNING - Turning cor-ners

Reduce speed when you turn cor-ners. The center of gravity of 4WDand 2WD utility vehicles are raisedhigher than that of conventional2WD cars, making them more likelyto roll over when you turn cornerstoo fast.

WARNINGDo not grab inside of the steeringwheel when you are driving off-road.Your arm may be hurt by a suddensteering maneuver or from steeringwheel rebound due to impact withobjects on the ground. You couldlose control of the steering wheel.

OBL046499N

4 17


• If you need to drive in water, stop yourvehicle, set your transfer knob to 4LOor LOW and drive at less than 8 km/h(5 mph).

• Do not drive in water if the level is high-er than the bottom of the wheel hubs.

• Check your brake condition once youare out of mud or water. Press thebrake pedal several times as you moveslowly until you feel normal brakingforces return.

• Shorten your scheduled maintenanceinterval if you drive off-road in condi-tions such as sand, mud or water (see“Scheduled Maintenance’’ in theIndex). Always wash your car thor-oughly.

• The full time four wheel drive vehiclecannot be towed by an ordinarily towtruck. Make sure that the vehicle istowed with its four wheels raised off theground.

• Since the driving torque is alwaysapplied to the 4 wheels the perform-ance of the 4WD vehicle is greatlyaffected by the condition of the tires.Be sure to equip them with all four tireswith same size and type.

WARNINGIf you are driving in heavy wind, thevehicle’s higher center of gravitydecreases your steering control.Drive more slowly than you wouldin calm conditions.

WARNING - Drivingthrough water

If you are driving too fast in water,the water spray can get into theengine compartment and wet theignition system, causing your vehi-cle to suddenly stop. If this hap-pens and your vehicle is in a tiltedposition, your vehicle may roll over.

WARNINGYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide for safe rideand handling capability.Do not use a size and type of tireand wheel that is different from theone that is originally installed onyour vehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling failureor rollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure toequip all four tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type, tread,brand and load-carrying capacity. Ifyou nevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheelcombination not recommended byKia for off road driving, you shouldnot use these tires for highway driv-ing.


184

• For speedometer test or inspection/maintenance (I/M) program of full-time4WD vehicle, use a four wheel chassisdynamometer.

• A 4WD vehicle should not be tested ona 2WD drive roll tester. If a 2WD rolltester must be used, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Check the tire pressures recommend-ed for your vehicle.

2. Place the rear wheels on the roll testerfor speedometer test as shown in theillustration.

3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the front wheels on the tempo-

rary free roller as shown in the illustra-tion.

E5BLA401Roll tester (speedometer)

Temporary free roller

CAUTIONNever engage the parking brakewhile performing these tests.

CAUTIONWhile the full-time 4WD vehicle isbeing raised on a jack, never startthe engine or cause the tires torotate.There is the danger that rotatingtires touching the ground couldcause the vehicle to go off the jackand to jump forward.If one of the front or rear wheelsbegins to spin in mud, snow, etc.the vehicle can sometimes be driv-en out by depressing the accelera-tor pedal further; however avoidrunning the engine continuously athigh rpm because doing so coulddamage the 4WD system.

WARNINGKeep away from the front of thevehicle while inspecting. This isvery dangerous as the vehicle canjump forward and cause seriousinjury or death.

4 19


A limited slip differential if equipped, is forthe rear wheel differential only. The fea-tures of this limited slip differential aredescribed below;Just as with conventional differential, thewheel on one side is allowed to turn at adifferent speed from the wheel on theother side when the vehicle is cornering.The difference between the limited slipdifferential and a conventional differentialis that if the wheel on one side of thevehicle loses traction, a greater amountof torque is applied to the rear wheel onthe other side to improve traction.

WARNINGTo avoid injury, never run theengine with one wheel off theground, such as when changing atire.

WARNING• Avoid high cornering speed.• Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at high speeds.

• In a collision crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likelyto die compared to a personwearing a seat belt.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver oversteers to re-enter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)


204

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would. The stopping distance, how-ever, will be somewhat longer.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

• When descending a long or steephill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-cle not slowing down at the usualrate and pulling to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Aftergoing through water, apply thebrakes lightly to regain smoothbraking performance.

WARNING - Parking brakeOperating the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a sudden loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. If you mustuse the parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

4 21


Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn and it'stime for new pads, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your frontbrakes or rear brakes (if equipped). Youmay hear this sound come and go or itmay occur whenever you depress thebrake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

✽ NOTICETo avoid costly brake repairs, do notcontinue to drive with worn brake pads.

Parking brake To apply the parking brake, pull the park-ing brake handle fully and firmly upwardwhile applying the service brake.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads as com-plete front or rear axle sets toensure smooth brake performance.

E2BLA416Z

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessive brakepad and brake rotor wear.


224

To release the parking brake, pull thehandle up slightly and push the releasebutton, then lower the handle to thereleased position while holding the but-ton in.

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminatedwhen the parking brake is applied withthe ignition switch in the START or ONposition.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released, theremay be a malfunction in the brake sys-tem. Immediate attention is necessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-tion or repair shop.

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped, do not usejust the gear shift lever to holdthe vehicle in position. Set theparking brake AND make sure thegearshift lever is securely posi-tioned in 1st (First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transmis-sion equipped vehicles and in P(Park) for automatic transmissionequipped vehicles.

• Never allow a person who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle or childrento touch the parking brake. If theparking brake is released unin-tentionally, serious injury mayoccur.

E2BLA417 W-75

4 23


Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an uphill

grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelsaway from the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves backward.

• When parking your vehicle on a down-hill grade, park as close to the curb aspossible and turn the front wheelstoward the curb so that the frontwheels will contact the curb if the vehi-cle moves forward.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)

The ABS system continuously sensesthe speed of the wheels. If the wheels aregoing to lock, the ABS system repeated-ly modulates the hydraulic brake pres-sure to the wheels.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS system is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS system in an emergencysituation, do not attempt to modulateyour brake pressure and do not try topump your brakes. Press your brakepedal as hard as possible or as hard asthe situation warrants and allow the ABSsystem to control the force being deliv-ered to the brakes.

WARNING - ABS BrakesYour ABS is not a substitute forgood driving judgement. You canstill have an accident. In fact, yourABS system will not be able to pre-vent an accident. You must espe-cially avoid:• Dangerous driving, such as

neglecting safety precautions,speeding, or driving too close tothe vehicle in front of you.

• Driving at high speed in situa-tions providing considerably lesstraction, such as wet conditionswhere hydroplaning could occur.

• Driving too fast on poor road sur-faces. The ABS is designed toimprove maximum braking effec-tiveness on typical highways androads in good condition. On poorroad surfaces, the ABS may actu-ally reduce braking effectiveness.


244

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the enginemay not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of the lowbattery voltage. It does not mean yourABS is malfunctioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

ABSW-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problemwith the ABS system. In this case,however, your regular brakes willwork normally.

• The ABS warning light will stayon for approximately 3 secondsafter the ignition switch is ON.During that time, the ABS will gothrough self-diagnosis and thelight will go off if everything isnormal. If the light stays on, youmay have a problem with yourABS system. Contact an author-ized Kia dealer as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,and operate your brakes continu-ously, the ABS will be active con-tinuously and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull your carover to a safe place and stop theengine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have a prob-lem with the ABS. Contact anauthorized Kia dealer as soon aspossible.

4 25


Power steeringPower Steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering the vehi-cle. If the engine is off or if the powersteering system becomes inoperative,the vehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

✽ NOTICEIf the power steering drive belt breaksor if the power steering pump malfunc-tions, the steering effort will greatlyincrease.

✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather (below -10°C/14°F), the power steering mayrequire increased effort when the engineis first started. This is caused byincreased fluid viscosity due to the coldweather and does not indicate a mal-function.When this happens, increase the engineRPM by depressing accelerator until theRPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release orlet the engine idle for two or three min-utes to warm up the fluid.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTIONNever hold the steering wheelagainst a stop (extreme right or leftturn) for more than 5 seconds withthe engine running. Holding thesteering wheel for more than 5 sec-onds in either position may causedamage to the power steeringpump.


264

Tilt steering (if equipped)A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjustthe steering wheel before you drive. Youcan also raise it to the highest level togive your legs more room when you exitand enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle, pullup the lock release lever (1), adjust thesteering wheel to the desired angle (2),then release the lock-release lever tolock the steering wheel in place. Be sureto adjust the steering wheel to thedesired position before driving.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

WARNING - Steering wheel• Never adjust the angle of steering

wheel while driving.You may loseyour steering control and causesevere personal injury or acci-dents.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.

5BLB4019 6BLA422C

➀

➁

CAUTION - Horn• To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol onyour steering wheel (see illustra-tion). The horn will operate onlywhen this area is pressed.

• Do not strike the horn severely tooperate it, or hit it with your fist.Do not press on the horn with asharp-pointed object.

4 27


The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onthe accelerator pedal.With cruise control, you can set andautomatically maintain any speed ofbetween 40 km/h (24 mph) and 160 km/h (96 mph).

To set cruise control speed:1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF button on

the steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 40 km/h (24 mph)and less than 160 km/h (96 mph).

3. Push the COAST/SET switch, andrelease it at the desired speed.The SETindicator light in the instrument clusterwill illuminate. Release the acceleratorat the same time.The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activated untilapproximately 2 seconds after theCRUISE ON-OFF button has beenengaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down while going down-hill.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise control

Do not use the cruise control fea-ture under the following conditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds

WARNINGIf the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated) thecruise control can be switched onaccidentally. Keep the cruise con-trol system off (CRUISE indicatorlight OFF) when cruise control isnot in use.

OBL064100 E2BLA421


284

To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Press the clutch pedal with a manual

transmission or shift into N (Neutral)with an automatic transmission.

• Press the CANCEL switch located onthe steering wheel.

• Press the COAST/SET and RES/ACCEL switches at the same time.

Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go OFF), butit will not turn the system off. If you wishto resume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/ACCEL switch located on yoursteering wheel. You will return to yourpreviously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will go OFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resumecruise control operation, repeat the stepsprovided in “To Set Cruise ControlSpeed” on the previous page.

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Releasethe switch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES/ACCEL switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1mph) each time the RES/ACCELswitch is operated in this manner.

E2BLA422A

4 29


To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control onIf you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress theaccelerator pedal. Increased speed willnot interfere with cruise control operationor change the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

To decrease the cruising speed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold

it. Your vehicle will gradually slowdown. Release the switch at the speedyou want to maintain.

• Push the COAST/SET switch andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1mph) each time the COAST/SET switchis operated in this manner.

To resume cruising speed atmore than 40 km/h (24 mph):If any method other than the CRUISEON-OFF switch was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when theRES/ACCEL switch is pushed.It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below 40 km/h (24mph).

E2BLA421 E2BLA422A


304

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)monitors information from various vehiclesensors and then compares the driver'scommands with the actual behavior of thevehicle. If an unstable condition occurs - asudden evasive movement for example -ESC intervenes within fractions of asecond via the engine computer andbrake system and attempts to stabilizethe vehicle.

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.

When operatingWhen the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control andindicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

- ESCESC

OBL036902N

4 31


ESC operation offESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESCis off, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, theESC will automatically turnon again.

• During ESC operation, if thetransfer shift knob is turnedfrom 2WD mode (2HI) to4WD mode (4HI or 4LO), theESC will automatically turnoff, and if it is turned from4WD mode (4HI or 4LO) to2WD mode (2HI), the ESCwill automatically turn onagain. (if part time 4WD isequipped)

Indicator lightWhen ignition switch is turned to ON, theindicator light illuminates, then goes off ifESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.ESC OFF indicator light comes on wheneither the ESC is turned off with the but-ton, or ESC malfunctions when turnedon.

ESC

ESCOFF

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

WARNING - ESCThe Electronic Stability Control sys-tem is only a driving aid; use pre-cautions for safe driving by slowingdown on curved, snowy, or icyroads. Don’t attempt to accelerateexcessively just because the ESCindicator light is blinking.

ESCOFF


324

ESC OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press ESC OFF button while ESCis operating (ESC indicator light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽ NOTICE• When measuring the vehicle speed

with a chassis dynamo-meter, makesure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFFlight illuminated). If the ESC is lefton, it may prevent the vehicle speedfrom increasing, and cause a falsediagnosis of a faulty speedometer.

• Turning the ESC off does not affectABS or brake system operation.

WARNING - ESCNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating.If the ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may slip outof control.To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

4 33


The rear parking assist system assiststhe driver during backward movement ofthe vehicle by chiming if any object issensed within a distance of 120 cm (47in.) behind the vehicle. This system is asupplemental system and it is not intend-ed to nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of the driver.The sensing range and objectsdetectable by the back sensors are limit-ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as muchattention to what is behind you as youwould in a vehicle without a rear parkingassist system.

Operation of the rear parkingassist systemOperating condition• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition key ON.If the vehicle is moved at speed over 5km/h (3 mph), the system may not acti-vated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the rearparking assist system is in operation isapproximately 120 cm (47 in.).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the closestone will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47

in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper :Buzzer beeps more frequently

• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)of the rear bumper : Buzzer soundscontinuously.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OBL036002

WARNINGThe rear parking assist system is asupplementary function only. Theoperation of the rear parking assistsystem can be affected by severalfactors (including environmentalconditions). It is the responsibilityof the driver to always check thearea behind the vehicle beforebacking up.


344

Non-operational conditions ofrear parking assist systemRear parking assist system may notoperate normally when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when moisturemelts.)

2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,such as snow or water, or the sensorcover is blocked. (It will operate nor-mally when the material is removed orthe sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise(vehicle horns, loud motorcycleengines, or truck air brakes) are withinrange of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.7. Sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

Detecting range may decrease when:1. Sensor is coverd with foreign matter

such as snow or water. (Sensing rangewill return to normal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremelyhot or cold.

Following objects may not be recog-nized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb sensor

frequency such as clothes, spongymaterial or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)in diameter.

CAUTION1. The rear parking assist system

may not sound sequentiallydepending on the speed andshapes of the objects detected.

2. The rear parking assist systemmay malfunction if the vehiclebumper height or sensor installa-tion has been modified or dam-aged. Any non-factory installedequipment or accessories mayalso interfere with the sensor per-formance.

3. Sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 40 cm (15 in.)from the sensor, or it may sensean incorrect distance. Use cau-tion.

4. When the sensor is covered withsnow, dirt or water, sensor maybe inoperative until the debris isremoved using a soft cloth

5. Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.

4 35


✽ NOTICEIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-tently when shifting the gear to “R” posi-tion, this may indicate a malfunction inthe rear parking assist system. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer as soon as possi-ble.

WARNINGPay close attention when the vehi-cle is driven close to objects on theroad, particularly pedestrians,especially children. Be aware thatsome objects may not be detectedby the sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effectiveness ofthe sensor. Always perform a visualinspection to make sure the vehicleis clear of all obstructions beforemoving the vehicle in any direction.

CAUTIONThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors; It can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slimobjects, such as poles or objectslocated between sensors may notbe detected by the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when driving back up.Be sure to inform any drivers in thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.Your new vehicle warranty does notcover any accidents or damage tothe vehicle or its occupants due torear parking assist system malfunc-tion. Always drive safely and cau-tiously.


364

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

ESC ESC

1. Tachometer2. Turn signal indicators3. Speedometer4. Engine temperature gauge5. Warning and indicator lights6. Trip odometer / Odometer7. Trip odometer reset button8. Fuel gauge9. Shift position indicator

(Automatic transmission only)

OBL026008C

4 37


SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

Odometer/Trip odometerYou can choose the odometer, tripodometer A or trip odometer B by press-ing the tripmeter mode button.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip odometerTRIP A: Trip odometer ATRIP B: Trip odometer BThe trip odometer indicates the distanceof individual trips selected by the driver.Trip odometer A and B can be reset to 0by pressing the reset button for 1 secondor more, and then releasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may move slight-ly when the ignition switch is in ACC orON position with the engine OFF. Thismovement is normal and will not affectthe accuracy of the tachometer once theengine is running.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

GAUGES

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine withinthe tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine dam-age.

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the“H” position, it indicates overheat-ing that may damage the engine.


384

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank.Fuel tank capacity : See Chapter 8The fuel gauge is supplemented by a lowfuel warning light, which will illuminatewhen the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Instrument panel illumination (if equipped)When the vehicle’s parking lights or head-lights are on, rotate the illumination con-trol knob to adjust the instrument panelillumination intensity.

WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addition-al fuel as soon as possible after thewarning light comes on or when thegauge indicator comes close to theE level.

6BLA429A

4 39


Warning lights / audible indica-tors Checking operation All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an Authorized KiaDealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning light (ifequipped)This light illuminates if the key is turnedto ON and goes off in approximately 3seconds if the system is operating nor-mally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS system. Contactan authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-sible.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD) sys-tem warning light (if equipped)If two warning lights illumi-nate at the same time whiledriving, your vehicle has aproblem with ABS and EBDsystem.

In this case, your ABS system and regu-lar brake system may not work normally.Have the vehicle checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer as soon as possi-ble.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

ABS

ABS

WARNING - Brake indica-tors

If the both ABS and Brake warninglights are ON and stay ON, yourvehicle’s brake system will not worknormally. You may experience anunexpected and dangerous situa-tion during sudden braking. In thiscase, avoid high speed driving andabrupt braking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorized Kia Dealeras soon as possible.


404

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing:1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an AuthorizedKia Dealer correct the problem assoon as possible.

Safety belt warning

If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the key is turned ON or if it isunfastened after the key is turned ON,the safety belt warning light blinks untilthe belt fastened.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transmission shiftlever selection.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped imme-diately, severe damage could result.

P R N D

4 41


Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobiliz-er key is inserted and turned to the ONposition to start the engine.At this time, you can start the engine.Thelight goes out after the engine is running.In case this light goes out before youstart the engine, you must turn to theLOCK position and restart the engine.If this light blinks when the ignition switchis in the ON position before starting theengine, have the system checked by anauthorized Kia Dealer.

Parking brake & brakefluid warning Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off when the parkingbrake is released.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have it towed to any Authorized KiaDealer for a brake system inspectionand necessary repairs.

To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

Rear hatch openwarning (if equipped)

This warning light comes on when therear hatch/window is not closed securely.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tank isnearly empty. The warning light will comeon when the fuel has a little amount.Refuel as soon as possible.

Rear hatch windowdefroster indicator

This light comes on when the rear hatchdefroster switch is depressed to removethe frost on the rear hatch glass.Press the switch again to shut off thedefroster when the frost is removed.The rear hatch window defroster willautomatically turn off after 20 minutes.It will also turn off whenever you removethe ignition key.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have thebrakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an Authorized Kia Dealer.


424

Door ajar warning

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-tion in any position.

Headlight high beamindicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

Malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) (checkengine light)This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors variousemission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential problem has beendetected somewhere in the emissioncontrol system.Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable, but have the system checked byan authorized Kia Dealer promptly.

✽ NOTICEA loose fuel filler cap may cause the OnBoard Diagnostic System MalfunctionIndicator Light ( ) in the instrumentpanel to illuminate unnecessarily.Always make sure that the fuel filler capis tight.

CAUTION - Check enginelight

• Prolonged driving with theEmission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminated may causedamage to the emission controlsystems which could effect dri-vability and/or fuel economy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( )begins to flash ON and OFF,potential catalytic converter dam-age is possible which could resultin loss of engine power. Have theEngine Control System inspectedas soon as possible by an author-ized Kia Dealer.

4 43


Air bag warning (if equipped)

This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu-minates while the vehicle is being driven,see an authorized Kia Dealer for immedi-ate service.

Auto cruise indicator(if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.

SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (COAST/SET orRES/ACCEL) is ON.

ESC indicator(Electronic StabilityControl) (if equipped) The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-onds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC light willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating.

ESC OFF indicator(if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicatingthe ESC is deactivated. If this indicatorstays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESCmay have a malfunction. Take your car tothe authorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

AIR

BAG

CRUISE

SET

ESC

ESCOFF


444

Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator(If equipped)This warning light indicates the washerfluid reservoir is near empty. Refill thewasher fluid as soon as possible.

4WD system warning (if equipped)

When the key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, the 4WD indicator light will come onand then go off in a few seconds.The 4WD indicator light will illuminatewhen the transfer shift knob is set to 4HIposition (Part time 4WD only).

4WD LOW indicator light(if equipped)

When the key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, the 4WD LOW indicator will comeon and then go off in a few seconds. The4WD LOW indicator light comes on whenthe transfer shift knob is set to 4WD LOWposition.Part-time 4WD : 4LO positionFull-time 4WD : Low position

Safety belt warning chime If the driver's safety belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition key is turned ON or if itis unfastened after the key is ON, thesafety belt warning chime will sound forapproximately 6 seconds. At this time, ifthe safety belt is fastened, the chime willstop at once.

Door ajar warning chime (if equipped)If a door is opened while driving the vehi-cle more than 3 mph (5 km/h), the warn-ing chime will sound.

Key reminder warning chime(if equipped)If the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch,the key reminder warning chime willsound. This is to prevent you from lockingyour keys in the vehicle.

CAUTIONIf the 4WD indicator light ( )blinks (full-time 4WD) or 4WD indi-cator light ( ) and 4WD LOW indi-cator light ( ) illuminate at thesame time (part time 4WD), thisindicates that there is a malfunctionin the 4WD system. If this occurs,have your vehicle checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer as soon aspossible.

4WDLOW

4WDLOW

4 45


The functions of multi-meter1. Azimuth Compass2. Distance to empty3. Average vehicle speed4. Driving time5. Ambient temperature (if equipped)

How to adjust the multi-meterSwitch functionMode/Set Switch Function

1. Selection of modes : If you push theMODE/SET switch for less than 1.5second, the mode will be selected asfollows.

2. Correction of Relative AzimuthCompass Indicator.

3. Correction of Terrestrial deviation ofthe Azimuth Compass.

4. Clear the average vehicle speed ordriving time to “0” (zero).

Up/Down Switch

1. Correction of the terrestrial deviationangle of the Azimuth Compass.

2. Conversion of the distance to empty.units (Km ⇔ Ml (mile))

3. Conversion of the average vehiclespeed. units (Km/h ⇔ MPH)

4. Conversion of the temperature. units(°C ⇔ °F)

MULTI-METER (IF EQUIPPED)

OBL036001 Azimuth Compass ↓

Distance to empty↓

Average vehicle speed ↓

Driving time

↓Ambient temperature

(if equipped)↓

OFF


464

Electric azimuth compassIt displays azimuth according to the vehi-cle’s driving direction.The indication is displayed only when thevehicle is in motion.

✽ NOTICEIf new vehicle is first driven or if thebattery has been disconnected, correctthe azimuth indicator before driving.

Correcting azimuth indicator It is needed to correct the error betweena current azimuth to terrestrial magnet-ism sensor and the displayed azimuth inthe vehicle position.

How to correct azimuth indicator1. If you push the MODE/SET switch and

hold for more than 1 second and lessthan 4.5 seconds, the azimuth indica-tor (DIR) will start blinking with thevehicle's present direction.

2. Slowly (about 5 km/h, 3 mph) rotatethe vehicle one turn (360 degree) with-in 128 seconds.The rotation could be made at anydirection(left or right) in an openspace.

3. When the rotation is finished, theazimuth compass indicator (DIR) willstop blinking and the error correction iscompleted.If the indicator continues to blink,rotate the vehicle a bit more until theblinking stops.

The azimuth compass indicator cor-rection will be cancelled:1. If you press MODE/SET switch for

more than 0.1 second.2. When the vehicle is not rotated within

128 seconds after the blinking of theindicator.

✽ NOTICEThe azimuth may display abnormally inspecific places (tunnel, parking lot inbuilding, underground parking lot, neartransformer substation, etc.). It is nor-mal and the azimuth is displayed nor-mally when escaping above mentionedplaces.

DIR

6BLA432

4 47


How to correct terrestrial deviation.

1. Press MODE/SET switch for morethan 4.5 seconds, then the present ter-restrial deviation angle value will bedisplayed after DIR blinking for 4.5seconds.

2. Press UP or DOWN switch for morethan 0.1 second to correct the AzimuthCompass within 30 seconds. If youpress UP switch, the Azimuth com-pass will move 5 degree to the Eastand it will move 5 degree to West if youpress DOWN switch.For the correct terrestrial deviationangle value for your location, refer tothe contour line map included.If your place is located in between theterrestrial deviation contour line, youcan apply any value (up or downvalue) for your location in the contourline map.The initial deviation angle is set to5°W.Terrestrial Correction Range:West 30° ~ East 30°.

3. To finish the correction, pressMODE/SET switch for more than 1second.

✽ NOTICEThe terrestrial deviation setting will beremembered even if the battery hasbeen disconnected.

The terrestrial deviation angle correc-tion will be cancelled:1.If you press MODE/SET switch for less

than 1 second.2.If you don't correct the terrestrial devia-

tion angle within 30 seconds.

✽ NOTICE1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

that is attached to the vehicle using amagnet as anything attached to theroof of the vehicle with a magnet willeffect compass operation.

2. If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication after repeated adjust-ment, have the compass checked at anauthorized dealer.

3. The compass may not indicate thecorrect compass point in tunnels orwhile driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehicle movesto an area where the geomagnetism isstabilized.)


484

The contour line map for terrestrial deviation angle correction

4 49


Distance to empty (km or MI)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty from the current fuel inthe fuel tank. When the remaining dis-tance is below 50 km (30 miles), a blink-ing “---” symbol will be displayed.Trip computer recognizes only theamount of fuel consumed to the engine.Therefore if the vehicle happens toabnormal oil leakage, the trip computerfails to sense causing the amount of fuelmore than it really is.

If you press the “DOWN” switch for morethan 5 seconds, the distance unit wouldtransfer to “Km” from “Ml (mile) or “MI” from“Km”.

✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “DISTANCE TO EMPTY”function may not operate correctly.The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters offuel are added to the vehicle.

• Trip computer provides a driver withsupplemental information about thecurrent operating status of your vehi-cle. So the estimated distance to emptycan be changed according to operat-ing status of your vehicle, average fuelconsumption and previously drivingstyle. Therefore the values approvedor displayed on LCD for the first timecan be different with your vehicles.

• The figure of distance to empty is esti-mated driving distance, so it can bedifferent from the driving distancereally is.

Average vehicle speed (km/h or MPH)This mode indicates the average speedfrom the starting of the vehicle to the igni-tion key “OFF”. When the “MODE/SET”switch is pushed (more than 1.5 sec-onds), it will initialize to “---”.

If you press the “DOWN” switch for morethan 5 seconds, the speed unit wouldtransfer to “Km/h” from “MPH” or “MPH”from “Km/h” .

RANGE

OBL046905N

AVG

OBL046902N


504

Driving timeThis mode indicates the total time fromthe starting of the vehicle to the ignitionkey “OFF” after resetting. When the“MODE/SET” switch is pushed, it will ini-tialize to 0:00.

Reset

Push “MODE/SET” for more than 1.5seconds to initialize the displayed infor-mation such as average speed and driv-ing time.

Ambient temperature (°C or °F )(if equipped)This mode indicates the current ambienttemperature. The meter’s working range -30°C(-30°F) to 65°C (149°F)

If you press the “DOWN” switch for morethan 5 seconds, the temperature unitwould transfer “°C” from “°F” or to “°F”from “°C”.

E/T

OBL046903N 6BLA433

4 51


Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the headlights and parkinglights when the driver removes the igni-tion key and opens the driver- sidedoor.

• With this feature, the parklight will beturned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on whenthe ignition key is removed, perform thefollowing :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON again

using the light switch on the steeringcolumn.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and aParklight position.To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:➀ OFF position➁ Parklight position➂ Headlight position

Parklight position ( )When the light switch is in the parklightposition (1st position), the tail, position,license and instrument panel lights areON.

Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position) the head, tail,position, license and instrument panellights are ON.

LIGHTING

S2BLA435C


524

High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever forward.The high-beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down.Green arrow indicators on the instrumentpanel indicate which turn signal is oper-ating. They will self-cancel after a turn iscompleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.

6BLA241 6BLA4036C 6BLA439

(A)

(B)

(B)

(A)

4 53


Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position.The lever will return to the OFF positionwhen released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out andwill require replacement.

✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quickor slow, bulb may be burned out or havea poor electrical connection in the cir-cuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility and avoid accidents when visibil-ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.The fog lights will turn on when fog lightswitch is turned to ON after the headlightis turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the switchto OFF.

Daytime running light (if equipped)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can makeit easier for others to see the front of yourvehicle during the day. DRL can be help-ful in many different driving conditions,and it is especially helpful after dawn andbefore sunset.The DRL system will make your high-beam headlights turn OFF when:1. The head light switch is ON.2. The parking brake engaged.3. Engine stops.

OBL046904N

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor.Unnecessary battery and generatordrain could occur if the fog lightsare used excessively.


544

A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipe· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped) · LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment(if equipped)

C : Wash with brief wipes

D : Rear wiper/washer control· – Spraying washer fluid· ON – Continuous wipe · INT – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped)· OFF – Off· – Wash with brief wipes

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Type A

Type B Type B

Type A

OBL047440N/OBL048440N/OBL047441N/OBL048441N

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer (if equipped)

4 55


Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push thelever upward and release it withthe lever in the OFF position. Thewipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward andheld.

OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in a light rain or mist. Tovary the speed setting, turn thespeed control knob. (if equipped)

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speed

✽ NOTICEBefore using the windshield wiperswhen there is a heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield, defrostthe windshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow or ice is removed. Thiswill help ensure proper windshieldwiper operation.

Windshield washers In the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 2-3cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.

OBL047442N

OBL048442N

Type A

Type B

OBL047447N

OBL048447N

Type A

Type B


564

WARNING - Windshieldwasher

Do not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defrosters;the washer solution could freeze oncontact with the windshield andobscure your vision.

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage to thewasher pump, do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir isempty.

If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located in thefront of the engine compartment on thepassenger side.

Rear window wiper and washerswitch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiperand washer switch lever. Turn the switchto desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do notoperate the wipers when thewindshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiperarms and other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

OBL047448N

OBL048448N

Type A

Type B

4 57


If the rear hatch window is open ( ),the rear wiper will not operate. Check therear hatch window warning light in theinstrument cluster, and make sure therear hatch window is closed completely.

- Spraying washer fluid and wipingOFF - Wiper is not in operationINT - Intermittent wiper operation ON - Normal wiper opertion

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from theinterior and exterior of the rear window,while engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center console switchpanel. The indicator on the cluster illumi-nates when the defroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation of snow onthe rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button again.

Outside mirror heater (if equipped)There is no control button for the outsidemirror heater, instead the outside mirrorheater automatically turns on when therear window defroster is turned on.

OBL026012N

CAUTION• To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the inside sur-face of the rear window, never usesharp instruments or windowcleaners containing abrasives toclean the window.

• To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, the rear windowdefroster will only operate whenthe engine is running.

• If you want to defrost and defogon the front windshield, refer to“Windshield Defrosting andDefogging” in this section.

DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)


584

Front windshield deicer(if equipped)To activate the front windshield deicer,press the front windshield deicer button.The indicator on the button illuminateswhen the deicer is ON.The front windshield deicer automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedefroster, press the front windshielddeicer button again.The front windshield deicer is designedto defrost wiper blades. If you want todefrost and defog on the front wind-shield, refer to “Windshield Defrostingand Defogging” in this section.

The hazard warning flasher causes therear tail lights and front turn signal lightsto flash on and off, which serves as awarning to other drivers to exercise cau-tion when approaching or passing yourvehicle.To activate the flasher, depress the haz-ard warning flasher switch. This switchoperates in any ignition switch position.To turn the flashers off, depress theswitch again.

OBL026013N OBL026010N

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

4 59


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OBL026014N

1. Fan speed control knob2. Mode selection knob3. Temperature control knob

4. Air intake control button5. Air conditioning button

(if equipped)


604

Fan speed control knob The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allows you tocontrol the fan speed of the air flowingfrom the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.Setting the mode selection knob to theOFF position turns off the fan.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment, turn the knob tothe right for warm and hot air or left forcooler air.

Mode selection knobThe mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The steps (•) between the air flow posi-tions adjust the direction of the air flow tothe middle position.

OBL026028N OBL026027 OBL026014N-1

4 61


MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode while the fanspeed is on, the followingsystem settings will be madeautomatically;• the air conditioning system

will be turned on.• the recirculated air position

will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/C mode,you will not be able to cancelthe A/C system operation, orchange the recirculated airmode position.Set the fan speed controlknob to the desired speedand rotate the temperaturecontrol knob to the extremeleft position for maximumcooling. (outlet port: , )B D

MAXA/C

OBL046470

AA

A A

D

D C

B

B


624

Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: , )

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor. The airto the floor is warmer thanthe air to the face (exceptwhen the temperature controlis set to the extreme coldposition).(outlet port: , , )

OFF position The climate control system isturned off.

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: , )

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: , , )

Defrost position Most of the air flow is directedto the windshield with a smallamount of air directed to theside window defrosters.(outlet port: , )

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport ( , ) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.The air from outlet port ( ) flows at anymode. Close the ventilation outlets usingthe knob to block the air flow if you do notwant the air.

B

B C D

DC

CA D

D

A D

B D

DOFF

OBL026026A

4 63


Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.With the recirculated air posi-tion selected, air from pas-senger compartment will bedrawn through the heatingsystem and heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

Outside (fresh) air positionWith the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the recirculated airposition selected, will result in excessive-ly dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

WARNING - Recirculatedair

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can result in somewhatreduced oxygen levels, causingdrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set the airintake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.


644

Air conditioning button (if equipped)Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate). Push the button again to turn theair conditioning system off.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the or position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-ing to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Set the temperature control knob to

the desired position.5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the extremeleft position, set the air intake control tothe recirculated air position, then setthe fan speed control to the highestspeed.

OBL026029

4 65


Air conditioning system opera-tion tips• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed at idle asthe air conditioning compressor cycleson. This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fanbut turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gaugeindicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay create water droplets insidethe vehicle. Since excessivewater droplets may cause dam-age to electrical equipment, airconditioning should only be runwith the windows closed.

CAUTIONThe air conditioner refrigerant con-tainer is highly pressurized.Therefore it should be serviced byan authorized Kia dealer. Improperservice may cause serious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.


664

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

MODE

1. AUTO (automatic control) button2. Indicator light3. Dual temperature control selection button4. Driver’s temperature control knob5. Defrost button6. Passenger’s temperature control knob7. Air conditioning button8. OFF button9. Mode selection button10. Fan speed control button 11. Outside (fresh) air position button12. Recirculated air position button

OBL026015A

4 67


Automatic operation

The automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicatedby AUTO on the display. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby temperature setting.

2. Turn the TEMP knob to set the desiredtemperature.If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting Lo, the air conditioning systemwill operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,press any button except temperaturecontrol knob and AUTO, DUAL button.If you press the mode selection button,air-conditioning button, defrost button,air intake control button or fan speedbutton, the selected function will becontrolled manually while other func-tions operate automatically.

Regardless of the temperature setting,when using automatic operation, the airconditioning system will automaticallyturn on to decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle, even if the temperature is setto warm.

Manual operation The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well by pushingbuttons other than the AUTO button. Inthis case, the system works sequentiallyaccording to the order of buttons select-ed.When pressing any button except AUTObutton while automatic operation, thefunctions of the buttons not selected willbe controlled automatically.Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem.

AUTO

CAUTIONNever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.


684

Temperature control knobThe temperature will increase to the maxi-mum HI by turning the knob to the rightextremely.The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum Lo by turning the knob to the leftextremely.When turning the knob, the temperaturewill increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.When set to the lowest temperature set-ting, the air conditioning will operate con-tinuously.

Dual temperature control selec-tion buttonAdjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually 1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Turning the right tempera-ture control knob will automaticallyswitch to the DUAL mode as well.

2. Turn the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature.Turn the right temperature control toadjust the passenger side tempera-ture.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to thesame as the driver side temperature.

2. Turn the left temperature control knob.The driver and passenger side tem-perature will be adjusted equally.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode willreset to display in Fahrenheit degrees.This is a normal system operation andyou can switch the temperature switch todisplay Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows:While depressing the AUTO button,depress the OFF button for 3 seconds ormore. The display will change fromCentigrade to Fahrenheit, or fromFahrenheit to Centigrade.

OBL026015AOBLA26015A

4 69


Fan speed control knob

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the fan speed controlbutton.The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered.Pressing the OFF button turns off thefan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

Recirculated air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when therecirculated air position isselected.With the recirculated air posi-tion selected, air from pas-senger compartment will bedrawn through the heatingsystem and heated or cooledaccording to the functionselected.

Outside (fresh) air positionThe indicator light on the but-ton is illuminated when theoutside (fresh) air position isselected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside andis heated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolonged oper-ation of the heating in recirculated airposition will cause fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculated airposition” selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.

WARNING - Recirculatedair

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Continued climate control systemoperation in the recirculated airposition can result in somewhatreduced oxygen levels, causingdrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set the airintake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.


704

Mode selection button

The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The air flow outlet port is converted asfollows:

MODE

OBL046470

AA

A A

D

D C

B

B

4 71


Face position Air flow is directed toward theupper body and face.Additionally, each outlet canbe controlled to direct the airdischarged from the outlet.(outlet port: , )

Face - floor position Air flow is directed towardsthe face and the floor. The airto the floor is warmer thanthe air to the face(except when the tempera-ture control is set to theextreme cold position).(outlet port: , , )

Floor position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor, with a smallamount of the air beingdirected to the windshieldand side window defroster.(outlet port: , )

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow is direct-ed to the floor and the wind-shield with a small amountdirected to the side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: , , )

Defrost button

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.(outlet port: , )A D

B

B C D

C D

CA D

D


724

Instrument panel ventsIf air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The outletport ( , ) can be opened or closed sep-arately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.The air from outlet port ( ) flows at anymode. Close the ventilation outlets usingthe knob to block the air flow if you do notwant the air.

Air conditioning button

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-tioning system on (indicator light will illu-minate).Push the button again to turn the air con-ditioning system off.

OFF button

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-mate control system. However you canstill operate the mode and air intake but-tons as long as the ignition switch is ON.

Outside tempmeter The current outer temperature is dis-played in 1°C (2°F) where the tempera-ture range is between -40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F~140°F).Press and hold the OFF and AUTO but-tons simultaneously for about 3~5 sec-onds to change the display from Celsiusto Fahrenheit. Repeat the procedure toswitch the outside temperature displayback to the previous state.

OBL026026A

D

D

BB

B D

D

A/C

OFFMODE OBL026015A

4 73


System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the or position.

Air conditioning All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-ing to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Set the temperature control to the


desired speed.6. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to the min-imum Lo (62°F/17°C) and set the airintake to the recirculated air position,then set the fan speed control to thehighest speed.


744

Air conditioning system opera-tion tips• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of win-dows on rainy humid days, decreasethe humidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed at idleas the air conditioning compressorcycles on. This is a normal systemoperating characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth if only for a few minutes toensure maximum system perform-ance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operatingcharacteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position doesprovide maximum cooling, however,continual operation in this mode maycause the air inside the vehicle tobecome stale.

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-ence on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTIONWhen using the air conditioningsystem, monitor the temperaturegauge closely while driving up hillsor in heavy traffic when outside tem-peratures are high. Air conditioningsystem operation may cause engineoverheating. Continue to use theblower fan but turn the air condi-tioning system off if the temperaturegauge indicates engine overheat-ing. CAUTION

The air conditioner refrigerant con-tainer is highly pressurized.Therefore it should be serviced byan authorized Kia dealer. Improperservice may cause serious injury.

CAUTIONWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.

4 75


Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select any fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air position is auto-

matically selected.If the outside (fresh) air position is notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air position is auto-

matically selected.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extreme highesttemperature setting and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OBL026031N OBL026032N

➀ ➁➂ ➃

➀ ➁➂ ➃

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.


764

Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield 1. Select desired fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position is auto-

matically selected.If the outside (fresh) air position are notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.2. Set fan speed to the highest position.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position is auto-

matically selected.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extreme highesttemperature setting and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield.

OBL046942N OBL046943N

➀ ➁➂ ➃

➀ ➁➂ ➃

WARNINGDo not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and that of the wind-shield could cause the outer sur-face of the windshield to fog up,causing loss of visibility. In thiscase, set the mode selection knobto the position and fan speedcontrol knob to the lower speed.

4 77


Defogging logicManual climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to the outside (fresh) airposition automatically if any of followingoccur.• The mode is selected to the or

while the system is activated.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the *,or .

• The ignition switch is turned off.• The fan is off.• The fan begins to be operated.Press the air intake control button toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.* : if equipped

How to cancel or return defogging logicof manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to thedefrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton will blink 3 times at 0.5 secondintervals. This indicates that the defog-ging logic is canceled or has returned tothe programmed condition.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the defog logic is reset to theoriginal condition.

OBL026033N

➀ ➁➂


784

Automatic climate control systemTo reduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield, the air intakecontrol is set to outside (fresh) air posi-tion automatically if any of followingoccur.• The ignition switch is turned on while

the mode is selected to the *, or.

• The OFF button is pushed.• The mode is selected to the *,

or position.In the or mode, it is impossible toselect the recirculated air position whilethe ignition switch is on.* : only if manually selected

How to cancel or return defogging logicof automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

2. Select the defrost position pressingdefrost button ( ).

3. While holding the air conditioning but-ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intakecontrol button ( ) at least 5 timeswithin 3 seconds.

The A/C display will blink 3 times at 0.5second intervals. This indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or hasreturned to the programmed condition.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the defog logic is reset to theoriginal condition.

OBL026036A

➀ ➁➂

5

Fuel requirements / 5-2

Emission control system / 5-3

Before driving / 5-5

Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6

Special driving conditions / 5-7

Using four-wheel drive / 5-11

Vehicle load limit / 5-25

Weight of the vehicle / 5-29

Trailer towing / 5-31

Label information / 5-39

Driving tips

Driving tips

25

FUEL REQUIREMENTSGasoline engine (unleaded)Your new Kia vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel with a minimumOctane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index(AKI).

For improved vehicle performance, pre-mium unleaded fuel with an octane ratingof AKI 91 or higher is recommended.

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alcohol),and gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alcohol)are being marketed along with or insteadof leaded or unleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing more than10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline orgasohol containing any methanol. Eitherof these fuels may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system.Discontinue using gasohol of any kind ifdrivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problemsmay not be covered by the manufactur-er’s warranty if they result from the useof:1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

CAUTIONNEVER USE LEADED FUEL. Theuse of leaded fuel is detrimental tothe catalytic converter and willdamage the engine control sys-tem’s oxygen sensor and affectemission control.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat Kia has specified. (Consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer for details.)

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which containsmethanol. Discontinue use of anygasohol product which impairs dri-vability.

5 3

Driving tips

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMThe emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Warranty &Consumer Information Manual in yourvehicle.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Kia could affect itsperformance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present withother exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) anymore than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to re-start theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions following toavoid CO poisoning.

Driving tips

45

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engine (unleaded).• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorized Kiadealer.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park the vehicle over ornear flammable objects, such asgrass, vegetation, paper, leaves,etc.

5 5

Driving tips

BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided inSection 7, Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgement. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink or takedrugs and drive.If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

Driving tips

65

SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATIONYour vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects how manykilometers (miles) you can get from aliter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-cle as economically as possible, use thefollowing driving suggestions to helpsave money in both fuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the

engine is running smoothly, begin driv-ing. Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowly afterstopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and follow therecommended periodic maintenanceschedule. This will increase the life ofall parts and lower your operatingcosts.

• Do not use the air conditioner unnec-essarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tire life and better fuel econ-omy, always keep the tires inflated tothe recommended pressures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops. Thiswill reduce wear on brake linings andpads. Driving in such a way will alsosave fuel because extra fuel is requiredto accelerate back to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weight in thevehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causeneedless wear, possible damage to thebrakes, and poor fuel economy.

• Improper wheel alignment results infaster tire wear and lower fuel econo-my.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorized Kiadealer perform scheduled inspectionsand maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not function with-out the engine running. Instead,keep the engine on and downshiftto an appropriate gear for enginebraking effect.

5 7

Driving tips

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, orother non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction when stalledin ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle tofree it from snow, sand, or mud, first turnthe steering wheel right and left to clearthe area around your drive wheels. Then,shift back and forth between 1 (First) andR (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with amanual transmission or R (Reverse) andany forward gear in vehicles equippedwith an automatic transmission. Do notrace the engine, and spin the wheels aslittle as possible. If you are still stuck aftera few tries, have the vehicle pulled out bya tow vehicle to avoid engine overheatingand possible damage to the transmis-sion.

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransmission, while driving on slip-pery surfaces can cause an acci-dent. The sudden change in tirespeed could cause the tires to skid.Be careful when downshifting onslippery surfaces.

WARNINGDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS. CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transmissiondamage or failure, and tire damage.

Driving tips

85

Driving at nightBecause night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could betemporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read-just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive throughthem slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 56 km/h (35mph). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheat,explode and injure bystanders.

CAUTIONThe ESC system (if equipped)should be turned OFF prior to rock-ing the vehicle.

5 9

Driving tips

Winter driving• We recommend that you carry emer-

gency equipment, including tire chains,a window scraper, windshield deicer, abag of sand or salt, flares, a smallshovel and jumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient ethyleneglycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reduce thecapacity of any battery, so it must be inexcellent condition to provide enoughwinter starting power.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze formulated windshieldwasher fluid. (Do not use enginecoolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if it mightfreeze. When parking, shift to 1 (First)or R (Reverse) with a manual trans-mission or P (Park) with an automatictransmission and block the rearwheels.

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your Kia,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without firstchecking local, state and municipal regu-lations for possible restrictions againsttheir use.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safety andhandling of your vehicle may beadversely affected.

Driving tips

105

Reducing the risk of a rolloverThis multi-purpose passenger vehicle isdefined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).SUV’s have higher ground clearance anda narrower track to make them capableof performing in a wide variety of off-roadapplications. Specific design characteris-tics give them a higher center of gravitythan ordinary cars. An advantage of thehigher ground clearance is a better viewof the road, which allows you to antici-pate problems. They are not designed forcornering at the same speeds as con-ventional passenger drive vehicles, anymore than low-slung sports cars aredesigned to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk, driverand passengers are strongly recom-mended to buckle their seatbelts. In arollover crash, an unbelted person ismore likely to die than a person wearinga seatbelt. There are steps that a drivercan make to reduce the risk of a rollover.If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers, do not load your roofrack with heavy cargo, and never modifyyour vehicle in any way.

Rollover warning labelTo remind you of the danger of therollover, a rollover warning label which isnow required by the Federal safety regu-lations is adhered to the driver’s sunvisor.

To remind you of the danger of therollover, the rollover warning label isadhered to the driver’s sunvisor. If youclose the driver’s sunvisor, you can seethe rollover warning label which is locat-ed at the side of the air bag warninglabel.

WARNING - Rollover As with other Sports Utility Vehicle(SUV), failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of con-trol, an accident or vehicle rollover.• Utility vehicles have a significant-

ly higher rollover rate than othertypes of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics(higher ground clearance, nar-rower track, etc.) give this vehiclea higher center of gravity thanordinary cars.

• A SUV is not designed for corner-ing at the same speeds as con-ventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

• In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likelyto die than a person wearing asafety belt. Make sure everyone inthe vehicle is properly buckledup.

Avoid Abrupt Maneuversand Excessive Speed.

Always Buckle Up.

See Owner's ManualFor Further Information.

5 11

Driving tips

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVEDriving on snow- or ice-coveredroads ("4HI, 4LO" for part-time4WD operation or "AUTO" for full-time 4WD operation)• Use snow tires. See “Tires” in this sec-

tion for more information.• Keep an adequate distance between

yourself and other vehicles.• Avoid sudden braking, acceleration or

steering.These actions can cause yourvehicle to lose traction.

Driving in sand or mud ("4HI,4LO" for part-time 4WD operationor "AUTO" for full-time 4WD oper-ation)• Avoid sudden braking, acceleration or

steering.These actions can cause yourvehicle to get stuck in the sand or mud.

• Drive at low speeds whenever possi-ble.

• You may need to get out of your vehi-cle at times to check road conditions.

• If you get stuck in the sand or mud, tryplacing stones, wood or other similarmaterials under the tires to get traction,or move forward and backward repeat-edly to get unstuck.

WARNING - TractionMake sure that no one stands infront of or behind the tires whenmaterials are placed under the tiresto get more traction. The tires maycause loose materials to fly outfrom under the vehicle, potentiallycausing serious bodily injury ordeath.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine damage, overheating, trans-mission differential or transfer casedamage or failure and tire damage.

Driving tips

125

Driving on a hill ("4LO" for part-time 4WD operation or "LOW" forfull-time 4WD operation)• Use low gear when going uphill or

downhill and avoid sudden braking.• Do not shift gears or use your clutch

when going downhill. Do not coastdownhill in Neutral.

Crossing a ditch ("4LO" for part-time 4WD operation or "LOW" forfull-time 4WD operation)• Avoid driving through ditches if possi-

ble, especially if there is water in theditch. Your vehicle may stall if the elec-trical system gets wet. If you mustcross a ditch, select 4LO or LOWmode.

• Avoid driving where the water level ishigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. If the water level rises above thismark, your vehicle will need to be serv-iced.

• Tap lightly on the brake pedal duringand after driving through water. Thiswill help keep the brakes dry and inproper working order.

• Do not shift gears while crossing aditch.

Tight corner brake effect

This is called tight corner brake effect.Tight corner brake effect is a uniquecharacteristic of four-wheel drive vehiclescaused by the difference in tire rotation atthe four wheels and the zero-degreealignment of the front wheels and sus-pension.Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-ried out with caution.

WARNING - 4WDWhen turning sharply on a pavedroad at low speed while in four-wheel drive, steering control will bedifficult.

5 13

Driving tips

Off-road driving with your four-wheel drive vehicleOff-road driving can be great fun. But ithas definite hazards. The greatest ofthese is the terrain itself.“Off-roading” means you’ve left the pavedroad system behind. Traffic lanes are notmarked. Curves are not banked.There are no carefully engineered roadsigns to warn you of dangerous condi-tions or to advise you of a safe speed.You have to assess the environmentyourself. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill or downhill.Off-road driving involves learning newskills. That’s why it’s important that youread and understand this section. You’llfind useful driving information and sug-gestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.

Before you go off-roadingThere are some things to do before youleave the paved roads. Be sure to haveall necessary maintenance and servicework done beforehand. Be sure to readall the information about your four-wheeldrive vehicle in this manual. Is thereenough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflat-ed? Are the fluid levels at the proper lev-els? What are the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you’ll be driving? If youdon’t know, you should check with lawenforcement people in the area. Will yoube on someone’s private land? If so, besure to get the necessary permission.

Loading your vehicle for off-roaddrivingThere are some important items toremember about how to properly loadyour vehicle.• The heaviest things should be in the

cargo area and forward of your rearaxle. Place heavier items as far forwardas you can.

• Be sure the load is properly secured,so driving over off-road terrain doesn’tshift your load or throw items towardthe driver or passengers.

Driving tips

145

Traveling to remote areasIt makes sense to plan your trip, espe-cially when going to a remote area. Knowthe terrain and plan your route. You aremuch less likely to encounter unwantedsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails.It’s also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happensto one of them, the other can quicklyhelp.

WARNING - Cargo• Cargo piled close to the height of

(or higher than) the seat backscan be thrown forward during asudden stop or on downhillslopes. You or your passengerscould be severely injured. Keepcargo below the top of the seatbacks and, if possible, do not pileseparate items.

• Unsecured cargo in the cargoarea can be tossed about whendriving on the highways or overrough terrain.You or your passen-gers can be struck by flyingobjects and severely injured.Secure the cargo properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Cargo should not be carried on

the roof without a proper roofrack installed. The roof rack willhold a maximum of 45 kg (100lbs.). Heavy loads in a roof rackraise the vehicle’s center of grav-ity, making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehicle rollsover. Do not load cargo on theroof while driving off-road, if at allpossible. Put heavy loads insidethe cargo area, not on the roof orin a roof rack. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward and lowas possible.

5 15

Driving tips

Getting familiar with off-road drivingIt’s necessary for you to practice in anarea that’s safe and close to home beforeyou begin serious off-road driving. Off-road driving requires new and differentdriving skills.You need to tune your senses to differentkinds of signals. For example, constantlysweep the terrain with your eyes lookingfor unexpected obstacles. Listen forunusual tire, gear, or engine sounds. Feeland respond to the vibrations of the vehi-cle with your hands, feet, and body whilestill carefully controlling your vehicle.You’ll also need to adjust your expecta-tions and greatly lower the number ofmiles you expect to cover in an hour or aday.Controlling your vehicle is the key to suc-cessful off-road driving. One of the bestways to control your vehicle is to controlyour speed. Here are some things tokeep in mind when traveling at higherspeeds:• You approach things faster and you

have less time to scan the terrain forobstacles.

• You have less time to react.• You have much more vehicle bounce

when you drive over obstacles, givingyou less vehicle control.

• You’ll need more distance for braking,especially since you’re on an unpavedsurface. Such terrain will always bemore “slippery” than a paved road.

Scanning the terrain

Off-road driving can take you over manydifferent kinds of terrain. You need to befamiliar with the terrain and its many dif-ferent features. Here are some things toconsider.

Surface conditionsOff-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the steering, acceleration, andbraking of your vehicle in different ways.Depending upon the kind of surface youare on, you may experience slipping,sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceler-ation, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances.

WARNING - Off road driv-ing

When you’re driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw you outof position in your seat. This couldcause you to lose control of thevehicle and crash. Whether you aredriving on or off the road, you andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Driving tips

165

WARNING - Drinking &driving

Drinking and driving, or drug useand driving can be very dangerouson any road. This certainly remainstrue for off-road driving. At the verytime you need special alertness anddriving skills, your reflexes, percep-tions and judgement can be affect-ed by even a small amount of alco-hol or drugs. You could have a seri-ous - or even fatal - accident if youdrink or take drugs and drive or ridewith a driver who has been drinkingor taking drugs.

Surface obstaclesUnseen or hidden obstacles can be haz-ardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bumpcan startle you if you’re not prepared.Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow or even the rise andfall of the terrain itself. Here are somethings to constantly evaluate:• Is the path ahead clear?• Will the surface texture change ahead?• Does the path take you uphill or down-

hill?• Might you have to stop suddenly or

change direction quickly?When you drive over obstacles or roughterrain, it is critical that you keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can force thewheel out of your hands if you’re not pre-pared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, orother obstacles, your wheels can leavethe ground. If this happens, even withone or two wheels, you can’t control thevehicle as well or perhaps at all. Becauseyou will be on an unpaved surface, it’sespecially important to avoid suddenacceleration, sudden turns, or suddenbraking. Any of these actions couldcause the center of gravity of the vehicleto shift and destabilize the vehicle, lead-ing to a collision or rollover accident.Off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roadsand highways. There are no road signs,posted speed limits or signal lights. Youhave to use your own judgment aboutwhat is safe and what isn’t. Bad judgmentin this uncontrolled environment can befatal.

5 17

Driving tips

Driving on off-road hillsOff-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safely onhills requires excellent judgment and anunderstanding of what your vehicle canand can’t do. There are some hills thatsimply should not be driven.

Approaching a hillWhen you approach a hill, you need todecide if it’s one of those hills that’s justtoo steep to climb, descend, or cross.Steepness can be difficult to judge. On avery small hill, for example, there may bea smooth, constant incline with only asmall change in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On alarge hill, the incline may get steeper asyou near the top, but you may not seethis because the crest of the hill is hiddenby bushes, grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consideras you approach a hill:• Is there a constant incline, or does the

hill get sharply steeper in places?• Is there good traction on the hillside, or

will the surface cause tire slipping?• Is there a straight path up or down the

hill so you won’t have to make turningmaneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill thatcan block your path (boulders, trees,logs or ruts)?

• What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff,an embankment, a drop-off, or afence? Get out of the vehicle and walkthe hill if you are unsure. It’s the smartway to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hillsoften have ruts, gullies, troughs, andexposed rocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects of erosion.

• How have weather conditions affectedthe terrain? Is there likely to be mud,snow or ice on the hill?

• What time of day is it? Are tempera-tures dropping so that wet surfaces willstart to freeze?

WARNING - Driving onhills

Many hills are simply too steep forany vehicle. If you drive up them,you will stall. If you drive downthem, you can’t control your speed.In either case, you could flip over. Ifyou drive across them, you will rollover. You could be seriously orfatally injured. If you have anydoubt about the steepness, don’tdrive up or down the hill, even if itmeans that you have to turn aroundand find another route. Re-trackingis a normal part of safe off-roading.

Driving tips

185

Driving uphillOnce you decide you can safely drive upthe hill, you need to take some specialsteps.• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on

the steering wheel.• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to

maintain your speed. Don’t use morepower than you need, because youdon’t want your wheels to start spin-ning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill, if at allpossible. If the path twists and turns,you may have to find another route.

• Slow down as you approach the top ofthe hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make youmore visible to approaching traffic ontrails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach thetop of the hill to let opposing trafficknow you’re there.

• Use your headlights even during theday. They make you more visible toother drivers.

Stalling while driving uphillWhat should I do if my vehicle stalls, or isabout to stall, and I can’t make it up thehill?If your vehicle stalls, or is about to stallwhile driving uphill, there are somethings you should do, and there are somethings you must not do. First, here’s whatyou should do:• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehi-

cle and keep it from rolling backwards.Also, apply the parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift thetransmission into reverse, release theparking brake, and slowly back downthe hill in reverse.

• If your engine has stopped running,you’ll need to restart it. With the brakepedal depressed and the parkingbrake still applied, shift a manual trans-mission to N (Neutral), or an automatictransmission to P (Park) and restartthe engine. Then, shift to reverse,release the parking brake, and slowlyback down the hill in reverse.

• As you are backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steering wheel atthe 12 o’clock position. This way, you’llbe able to tell if your wheels arestraight or turned to the left or right asyou back down.

WARNING - Driving acrosshills

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, or justreach an area too steep to traverse.In any case, it could cause you toroll over. You could be seriously orfatally injured. When driving uphills, always try to go as straight upas possible.

WARNING - Driving overhills

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill atfull speed can cause an accidentand result in serious or fatal injury.There could be a drop-off, embank-ment, cliff, another vehicle or peo-ple sitting on the ground. As younear the top of a hill, slow down andstay alert.

5 19

Driving tips

Here are some things you must not do ifyou stall, or are about to stall, whengoing up a hill.• Never attempt to prevent a stall by

depressing the clutch or shifting to N(Neutral) to “rev-up” the engine andregain forward momentum. This won’twork. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out ofcontrol or roll over.

Instead, apply the brake to stop the vehi-cle. Then apply the parking brake. Shiftinto reverse, release the parking brake,and slowly back down.

Stalled on a steep uphillIf your vehicle stalls and you can’t backdown the hill, try this: Set the parkingbrake, put your transmission in 1 (First)gear or P (Park), and turn the engine off.Leave the vehicle and get some help. Ifyour vehicle is at an angle to the slope ofthe hill, exit the vehicle on the uphill sideand stay clear of the path the vehiclewould take if it rolled downhill. Leave it in1 (First) gear for manual transmission orP (Park) for automatic transmission.

WARNING - STALLINGNever attempt to turn around if youare about to stall when going up ahill. If the hill is steep enough tostall your vehicle, it’s steep enoughto cause you to roll over if you turnaround. If you can’t make it up, youmust back down the hill.

WARNING - Exiting vehicleGetting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped across anincline is dangerous. If the vehiclerolls over, you could be crushed orfatally injured. Always get out onthe uphill (high) side of the vehicleand stay well clear of the rolloverpath.

WARNING - Leaving vehi-cle

If you are going to leave your vehicle,set the parking brake and shift amanual transmission to 1 (First), oran automatic transmission to P(Park).

Driving tips

205

Driving downhillGoing downhill can be considerably moredangerous than driving uphill. When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want toconsider many of the same things youthought about before you went uphill. Asa brief reminder, those include:• How steep is the downhill? Will I be

able to maintain vehicle control?• What’s the surface like? Smooth?

Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt?Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles?Ruts? Logs? Boulders?

• What’s at the bottom of the hill? Isthere a hidden creek bank or even ariver bottom with large rocks?

• Have changes in the weather condi-tions and their effect on the terrainsince you went uphill made your taskmore difficult?

Once you have decided that you can godown a hill safely, try to keep your vehicleheaded straight down, and use a lowgear. This way, engine braking can helpyour brakes so they won’t have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping yourvehicle under control at all times.

Avoid turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that’s not toosteep to drive down may be too steep todrive across. You could roll over if youdon’t drive straight down.Never go downhill with the clutch pedaldepressed. This is called “free-wheeling.”Your brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

If your wheels lock up during downhillbraking, you may feel the vehicle startingto slide sideways. To regain your direc-tion, just ease off the brakes and steer tokeep the front of the vehicle pointingstraight downhill.

WARNING - BrakingHeavy braking when going down ahill can cause your brakes to over-heat and fade. This could causeloss of control and a serious acci-dent. Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

WARNING - Wheel lockingAvoid braking so hard that you lockthe wheels when going downhill. Ifyour front wheels are locked, youcan’t steer your vehicle.

WARNING - DownhillBefore beginning to go downhill, itis critical that you ensure that nocargo can shift forward while youare heading downhill. Such shiftingcould either endanger you and youroccupants, or interfere with yourability to control the vehicle.

5 21

Driving tips

Stalling downhillStalling is much more likely to happengoing uphill. But if it happens goingdownhill, here’s what to do.• Stop your vehicle by applying the

brakes. Then apply the parking brake.• Move the shift lever to P (Park) in auto-

matic transmission or shift to N(Neutral) in manual transmission and,while still braking, restart the engine.

• Shift back to a low gear, release theparking brake, and drive straight down.

• If the engine won’t start, get out andseek help. Exit on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill.

Driving across an inclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will prob-ably go across the incline of a hill. If thishappens, you have to decide whether ornot to try to drive across the incline. Hereare some things to consider:• A hill that can be driven straight up or

down may be too steep to drive across.When you go straight up or down a hill,the length of the wheel base (the dis-tance from the front wheels to the rearwheels) reduces the likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end. Butwhen you drive across an incline, themuch narrower track width (the dis-tance between the left and rightwheels) may not prevent the vehiclefrom tilting and rolling over. Also, driv-ing across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This couldcause a downhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problemwhen you drive across a hill. Loosegravel, muddy spots, or even wet grasscan cause your tires to slip sideways. Ifthe vehicle slips sideways, it can hitsomething that will tip it (a rock, a rut,etc.) and cause it to roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steep-ness of the incline even worse. If youdrive across a rock with the uphillwheels, or if the downhill wheels dropinto a rut or depression, your vehiclecan tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need todecide carefully whether or not to try todrive across an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesn’tmean you have to drive it.

WARNING - Roll overDriving across an incline that’s toosteep will make your vehicle rollover. You could be seriously orfatally injured. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, don’t drive across it. Findanother route instead.

Driving tips

225

If your vehicle slides downhillIf you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill immediately. Thisshould help straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping. However, amuch better way to prevent this is to getout and “walk the course” first so youknow what the surface is like before youdrive it.

Stalling while crossing an inclineIf your vehicle stalls when you’re crossingan incline, be sure you (and your pas-sengers) get out on the uphill side, evenif that door is harder to open. If you getout on the downhill side and the vehiclestarts to roll over, you’ll be in its path.If you have to walk down the slope, stayout of the path the vehicle will take if itdoes roll over.

Driving in mud, sand, snow, or iceWhen you drive in mud, sand, snow, orice, your wheels won’t get good traction.You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning ismore difficult, and you’ll need longerbraking distances.It’s best to use a low gear when you’re inmud, the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. In extremely deep mud, the idea isto keep your vehicle moving so you don’tget stuck.When you drive on sand, you’ll sense achange in wheel traction. But it willdepend upon how loosely packed thesand is. On loosely packed sand (as onbeaches or sand dunes) your tires willtend to sink into the sand. This has aneffect on steering, accelerating, andbraking. You may want to reduce the airpressure in your tires slightly when driv-ing on sand. This will improve traction.Remember to re-inflate them the firstchance that you have after you leave theloosely packed sand.

WARNING - Exiting vehicleGetting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped across anincline is dangerous. If the vehiclerolls over, you could be crushed orfatally injured. Always get out onthe uphill (high) side of the vehicleand stay well clear of the rolloverpath.

5 23

Driving tips

Hard-packed snow and ice offer theworst tire traction. On these surfaces, it’svery easy to lose control. On wet ice, forexample, the traction is so poor that youwill even have difficulty accelerating. Andif you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can easily cause you toslide out of control.

Driving in waterLight rain causes no special off-road driv-ing problems. However, heavy rain cancause flash flooding, and flood watersdemand extreme caution.Find out how deep the water is beforeyou drive through it. If it’s deep enough tocover your wheel bearing hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe, don’t try it, You probablywon’t get through. Also, water that deepcan damage your axle and other vehicleparts.If the water isn’t too deep, then drivethrough slowly. At fast speeds, water cansplash on your ignition system and yourvehicle can stall. Stalling can also occurif your tailpipe goes underwater. As longas your tailpipe is underwater, you willnot be able to start your engine. Whenyou go through water, remember that itmay take you longer to stop when yourbrakes are wet.If you have driven through water that wasdeep enough to cover your wheel bear-ing hubs, it may be a good idea to havean Authorized Kia dealer or other com-petent service center repack your frontwheel bearings and examine your rear-end fluid for evidence of water.

CAUTION• In case of loss of traction in mud,

loose soil, or sand, turn the steer-ing wheel rapidly from side-to-side. This can help generate addi-tional traction.

• Do not gun the engine. This willcause the tires to spin and digdown, not forward, and couldbury the vehicle to the frame.Smooth, easy power is betterthan too much power.

WARNING - Frozen sur-faces

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds orrivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currents underthe ice, or sudden thaws can weak-en the ice. Your vehicle could fallthrough the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Driveyour vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving tips

245

After off-road drivingRemove any brush or debris that has col-lected on the underbody, chassis orunder the hood. These accumulationscan be a fire hazard.After driving in mud or sand, clean andcheck the brake linings. Accumulation ofmud or sand can cause glazing anduneven braking. Check the body struc-ture, steering, suspension, wheels, tires,and exhaust system for damage. Also,check the fuel lines and cooling systemfor any leakage. Your vehicle will alsorequire more frequent service due to off-road use.

WARNING - WaterDriving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengers coulddrown. If it’s only inches deep, itcan still wash away the ground fromunder your tires, and you could losetraction and roll the vehicle. Neverdrive through rushing water.

5 25

Driving tips

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading informationlabelThe label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

Steps for determining correctload limit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 635 kg(1400 lbs.), and there will be five68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 295 kg (650 lbs.).(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

/

/

/

/

/ /

P245/70R16

P245/70R16

P245/70R16

210kPa, 30psi

210kPa, 30psi

210kPa, 30psi

400400 882

882

/

/

/

/

/ /

P245/65R17

P245/65R17

P245/65R17

210kPa, 30psi

210kPa, 30psi

210kPa, 30psi

400400 882

882

6BLN5001/6BLN5001N

Driving tips

265

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2(300 lbs)

CAvailable Cargo and 499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM




B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5(750 lbs)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5(860 lbs)



A B C

Example 3

5 27

Driving tips

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and load-ing information label for specificinformation about your vehicle'scapacity weight and seating posi-tions. The combined weight of thedriver, passengers and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle's capacityweight.

Compliance labelThe compliance label is located onthe driver's door sill.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts, includ-ing tires on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change theway your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehi-cle.

Driving tips

285

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

CAUTION• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by your war-ranty. Do not overload yourvehicle.

• Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

5 29

Driving tips

WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLE - WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILERThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sSpecifications and the compliancelabel:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. Whentowing, trailer tongue load or king pinweight also is part of the CargoWeight.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the compliance label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weightrating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the compliance labellocated on the driver's door pillar.

GCW (Gross CombinedWeight)This is the weight of the loaded vehi-cle (GVW) plus the weight of the fullyloaded trailer.

Driving tips

305

GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and the loadedtrailer - including all cargo and pas-sengers - that the vehicle can handlewithout risking damage. (Important :The towing vehicle's braking systemis rated for operation at GVWR, notGCWR. Separate functional brakesshould be used for safe control oftowed vehicles and for trailers weigh-ing an 750kg (1,653 lbs).) The GCWmust never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Trailer WeightThis is the highest possible weight ofa fully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. It assumes a vehicle with onlymandatory options, no cargo, and adriver. The weight of other optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inyour vehicle will reduce the maxi-mum trailer weight your vehicle cantow.

Calculating the load your vehi-cle can tow1. Use the appropriate maximum

GCWR chart (in the Weight of theTrailer section in this chapter) foryour type of drive system andtransmission.

2. Weigh your vehicle.3. Subtract the weight of your vehicle

from the maximum GCWR in thechart. This is the maximum trailerweight your vehicle can tow. Itmust be below the maximum trail-er weight shown in the chart. Notethat the maximum trailer weightyour vehicle can tow depends onthe total weight of any cargo, pas-sengers and available equipmentin the vehicle.

5 31

Driving tips

TRAILER TOWING

To identify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, you shouldrefer to the chart on this page.

WARNING - Towing a trail-er

If you don't use the correct equip-ment and drive properly, you canlose control when you pull a trailer.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well- or even at all. You and your pas-sengers could be seriously or fatal-ly injured. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in thissection.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure the totaltrailer weight, gross combinationweight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue loadare all within the limits.

Item4WD*1 2WD*2 4WD*1 2WD*2

Maximum 3,665 kg 3,572 kg 4,339 kg 4,255 kg

GCWR (8,079 lbs) (7,874 lbs) (9,565 lbs) (9,314 lbs)

Maximum

Trailer Weight

3.3 Engine

1,590 kg (3,500 lbs)

*1 : Four Wheel Drive*2 : Two Wheel Drive

2,268 kg (5,000 lbs)

3.8 Engine

✽ NOTICE• For definitions of terms used in this table and instructions on how to calculate

your vehicle load, refer to Weight of the Vehicle in this chapter. • The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must

not exceed the GCWR.• When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and/or on steep

grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine from overheat-ing. This may result in a temporary increase of interior temperature.

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section.

Driving tips

325

Remember that trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering causes major changes in han-dling, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering requires cor-rect equipment, and cautious driving.This section contains many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.Load-pulling components such as theengine, transmission, wheel assemblies,and tires are forced to work harderagainst the load of the added weight. Theengine is required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greater loads.This additional burden generates extraheat. The trailer also adds considerablyto wind resistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:• State, provincial, county and municipal

government have varying traileringlaws. Make sure your hitch, mirrors,lights and wiring arrangements arelegal, not only where you live, but alsowhere you’ll be driving. A good sourcefor this information is state or local lawenforcement agencies.

• Consider using a sway control.You canask a hitch dealer about sway control.

• After your odometer indicates 800 km(500 miles) or more, you can tow atrailer. For the first 800 km (500 miles)that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and don’t makestarts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle“wear” in at the heavier loads.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 100 km/h (60mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towingspeed limit, whichever is lower.

• The important considerations have todo with weight:

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than the maxi-mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. Buteven that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use yourtrailer. For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and howmuch your vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. The ideal trailer weightcan also depend on any special equip-ment that you have on your vehicle.

5 33

Driving tips

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle. This weightincludes the curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight. After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may be able tocorrect them simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Hitches It's important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by, and rough roads are a few rea-sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install atrailer hitch? If you do, then be sure toseal the holes later when you removethe hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust canget into your vehicle, as well as dirt andwater.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are notintended for hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other bumper-typehitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

WARNING - Trailer• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately40% of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer or trail-er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in damage toyour vehicle and/or personalinjury. Check weights and loadingat a commercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped withscales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.

Driving tips

345

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-ufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trailer.And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesloaded, then it needs its own brakes andthey must be adequate. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before setting outfor the open road, you must get to knowyour trailer. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and notnearly so responsive as your vehicle isby itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform, safety chains, electricalconnector(s), lights, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-ing and then apply the trailer brake con-troller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electri-cal connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still work-ing.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolutelycertain that you have properly setup the brake system. This is not atask for amateurs. Use an experi-enced, competent trailer shop forthis work.

5 35

Driving tips

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-cle ahead as you would when drivingyour vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distance upahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,because you’re a good deal longer, you’llneed to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move the trailerto the left, just move your hand to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guideyou.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this so yourtrailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal flasher andextra wiring. The green arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properlyconnected, the trailer lights will also flashto alert other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think driversbehind you are seeing your signalswhen, in fact, they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trail-er bulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you discon-nect and then reconnect the wires.

Driving tips

365

Do not connect a trailer lighting systemdirectly to your vehicle’s lighting system.Use only an approved trailer wiring har-ness.Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assistyou in installing the wiring harness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, youmight have to use your brakes so muchthat they would get hot and no longeroperate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45mph) to reduce the possibility of engineand transmission overheating.If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesand you have an automatic transmission,you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-ing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) whentowing a trailer will minimize heat build upand extend the life of your transmission.If you have a manual transmission, drivein fourth gear (or, as you need to, a lowergear).

WARNINGFailure to use an approved trailerwiring harness could result in dam-age to the vehicle electrical systemand/or personal injury.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not over-heat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves acrossthe dial towards “H” (HOT), pullover and stop as soon as it is safeto do so, and allow the engine toidle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speeddepending on trailer weight anduphill grade to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transmissionoverheating.

5 37

Driving tips

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park your vehi-cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.People can be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged if they begin a downhill tra-jectory.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into

gear.2. Have someone place chocks under

the trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place,

release the brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-ing brake, and then shift to R(Reverse) for a manual transmission orP (Park) for an automatic transmis-sion.

5. Release the brakes.

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the manual transmission in

Neutral or automatic transmission in P(Park), apply your brakes and hold thebrake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brake isnot firmly set.If you have left the engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly. Youor others could be seriously orfatally injured.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with atrailer attached could cause seriousinjury or death, should the trailerbreak lose.

Driving tips

385

Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you regularly pull a trailer.Important items to pay particular atten-tion to include engine oil, automatictransmission fluid, axle lubricant andcooling system fluid. Brake condition isanother important item to frequentlycheck. Each item is covered in this man-ual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these sections before you startyour trip.Don’t forget to also maintain your trailerand hitch. Follow the maintenanceschedule that accompanied your trailerand check it periodically. Preferably, con-duct the check at the start of each day’sdriving. Most importantly, all hitch nutsand bolts should be tight.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occurin hot days or during uphill driv-ing. If the coolant gauge indicatesover-heating, switch off the A/Cand stop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transmissionfluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fan toimprove engine performancewhen towing a trailer.

5 39

Driving tips

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labels andidentification numbers located on yourvehicle. The label locations are identifiedin the illustrations shown.

Vehicle identification number(VIN)

S2BLD304

OBL056901N

VIN label

ESRT-VIN

OBL056902N

Frame number

Compliance label VIN bar code

Driving tips

405

Tire specification / pressure label Engine Number

E2BLD502A OBL086002

6

Road warning / 6-2

Overheating / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

Electrical circuit protection / 6-7

Towing / 6-14

If you have a flat tire / 6-19



26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle. Itshould be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

OBL026010N

6 3


OVERHEATING If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, if you experience a loss ofpower, or if you hear a loud knocking orpinging noise, the engine has probablyoverheated. Should any of these symp-toms occur, use the following procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,

then drive to the nearest safe locationand stop your vehicle; set the automat-ic transmission in P (Park), or shift themanual transmission to N (Neutral)and apply the parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator, stop the engine and call anAuthorized Kia Dealer for assistance.

If coolant is not boiling out, allow theengine to idle and open the hood topermit the engine to cool gradually.If the temperature does not go downwith the engine idling, stop the engineand allow sufficient time for it to cool.

4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reservoir islow, look for leaks at the radiator hosesand connections, heater hoses andconnections, radiator, and waterpump. If you find a major leak or anoth-er problem that may have caused theengine to overheat, do not operate theengine until it has been corrected. Callan Authorized Kia Dealer for assis-tance. If you do not find a leak or otherproblem, carefully add coolant to thereservoir.

If the engine frequently overheats, havethe cooling system checked and repairedby an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure. Thiscould cause serious injury.


46

EMERGENCY STARTING Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures listed on page 6-6. If in doubt, westrongly recommend that you have acompetent technician or towing servicejump start your vehicle.

✽ NOTICEUse only a 12-volt jumper system. Youcan damage a 12-volt starting motor,ignition system, and other electricalparts beyond repair by use of a 24-voltpower supply (either two 12-volt batter-ies in series or a 24-volt motor generatorset).

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

• Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.

6 5


Connecting jumper cables

OBL046616N

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Jumper CablesBooster battery


66

Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence shown in the previous illus-tration. First connect one end of ajumper cable to the positive terminal ofthe discharged battery (➀), then con-nect the other end to the positive ter-minal on the booster battery (➁).Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (➂), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the enginelifting bracket) away from the battery(➃). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct bat-tery terminals or the correct ground.Do not lean over the battery whenmaking connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent, you should have your vehi-cle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Push-starting Your manual transmission-equippedvehicle should not be push-startedbecause it might damage the emissioncontrol system.Vehicles equipped with automatic trans-mission cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this section forjump-starting.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative ter-minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged bat-tery to overheat and crack, releas-ing battery acid.

6 7


ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

FusesA vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has two fuse panels, onelocated in the driver's side panel bolster,the other in the engine compartmentnear the battery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse will bemelted.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an Authorized Kia Dealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: blade typefor lower amperage rating and cartridgetype, fusible link for higher amperage rat-ings.

Fuse replacement

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to remove fusesbecause it may cause a short circuitand damage the system.

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensivewiring damage and possibly afire.


86

Driver’s side panel1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided on themain fuse box in the engine compart-ment fuse relay box (if equipped).Refer to the fuse panel chart on thefuse panel cover to identify the likelyproblem fuse or electrical circuit.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown. The number of fuses varyaccording to the vehicle model. Checkboth the passenger and engine com-partment fuse box covers.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kiadealer.If you do not have a spare, use a fuse ofthe same rating from a circuit you maynot need for operating the vehicle, suchas the cigar lighter fuse.If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse block in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced. Engine compartment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-ing the taps on both ends and pullingup.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the main fusebox.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized KiaDealer.

FUSE

E2BLA604 OBL086001

Fuse Box

6 9


Main fuseIf the MAIN fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽ NOTICEIf the MAIN fuse is blown, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

If the ALTERNATOR is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽ NOTICEIf the ALTERNATOR is blown, consultan Authorized Kia Dealer.

E2BLA606A

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse box in theengine compartment, securelyinstall the fuse box cover. If not,electrical failures may occur fromwater leaking in.

OBL066001

Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.


106

Driver’s side panel

TPMS

OBL066102N

MAIN 140AMAIN 140A

C/FAN

OBL066905N

Engine compartment

Alternator fuse

OBL066904

OBL066906

6 11


Driver side panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentW/SHD* 15A Rear window defrosterTPMS* 10A Tire pressure monitoring systemWIPER(FRT) 20A Front wiperDRL/OBD-II* 15A Daytime running lightHAZARD 15A Hazard warning lightWIPER(RR) 10A Rear wiperS/ROOF* 20A SunroofO/S MIRROR 10A Outside rearview mirrorRELAY COIL 10A Ignition coilSTART 10A Start motorS/WARMER 20A Seat warmerACC 15A AccessorySTOP LAMP 20A Stop lightTCCS 20A TCS, ESC, ImmobilizerROOM LAMP 10A Room lampCIGAR(FRT) 15A Cigar lighterO/S MIRROR DEF 20A Outside rearview mirror heater ENGINE 10A Engine control unitMETER 10A Multi-meterABS IG 10A ABSA/BAG 10A AirbagTURN LAMP 10A Turn signal lightPOWER SEAT 30A Power seatDOOR LOCK 20A Central door lockSPARE 20A Spare fuse

* : if equipped


126

Engine compartment

Description Fuse rating Protected componentHORN 15A HornAUDIO 30A AudioMAIN 140A AlternatorALTERNATOR* 150A AlternatorHEAD (HI) 15A Headlight (high)HEAD (LO) 15A Headlight (low)DEF 25A Rear window defrosterMEMORY 10A Cluster, ETACS, A/C, Clock,

Room lampF/FOG* 15A Front fog lightIGN 2 30A IgnitionABS* 40A ABSF/PUMP* 20A Fuel pumpC/FAN 30A Radiator fanIGN 1 40A IgnitionEXT AMP 30A AmplifierILLUMI 10A Instrument panel illuminationEXT* 15A Taillight, Turn signal lightCENTER P/OUTLET 15A Power outletBTN 3 40A In panel B+F/BLW 30A BlowerBTN 1 40A In panel B+BTN 2 30A In panel B+P/TRN 10A Power train control system sen-

sors,TCU

* : if equipped

Description Fuse rating Protected componentP/OUTLET 30A Power outletP/W LH 25A Power window (left)P/W RH 25A Power window (right)INJECTOR* 15A InjectorIG COIL 10A Ignition coilO2 SNSR 15A O2 sensorECU* 15A Engine control unitSPARE 25A Spare fuseSPARE 20A Spare fuseSPARE 15A Spare fuseSPARE 10A Spare fuse

6 13


Memory fuseYour vehicle is equipped with a “MemoryFuse” to prevent battery discharge if yourvehicle is parked without being operatedfor prolonged periods. Use the followingprocedures before parking the vehicle forprolonged period.1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the main fuse box cover in

engine compartment and pull up the“AUDIO 30A”. This will change thememory fuse mode to prevent batterydischarge.

E2BLA606B

CAUTION• If the memory fuse is pulled up

from the fuse box housing, thekey reminder warning chime,door ajar warning chime andlight, and clock will not operate.The clock must be reset.

• Even though the memory fuse ispulled up, the battery can still bedischarged by operation of theheadlights or other electricaldevices.


146

TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truckservice. Proper lifting and towing proce-dures are necessary to prevent damageto the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.

On 4WD vehicles, your vehicle mustbe towed with a wheel lift and dolliesor flatbed equipment with all thewheels off the ground.

On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to towthe vehicle with the front wheels on theground (without dollies) and the rearwheels off the ground.When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, therear of the vehicle should always be lift-ed, not the front.

E4BLA609A E4BLA609B E4BLA630

6 15


When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies (2WDVehicles or Part-time 4WD Vehicles):1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.2. Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Place the transfer shift knob for part-

time 4WD operation in the 2HI posi-tion.

4. Release the parking brake.

Towing with a vehicle other thana tow truck If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an Authorized Kiadealer or a commercial tow truck service.

E4BLA610

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle forwards

with the rear wheels on theground as this may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-ment. Use wheel lift or flatbedequipment.

CAUTIONFailure to place the transmissionshift lever in N (Neutral) and thetransfer shift knob for part-time4WD operation to 2HI may causeinternal damage to the transmis-sion.

6BLA611


166

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the front of the vehicle. Useextreme caution when towing the vehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-ditions from which the vehicle cannotbe driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady andeven force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-ing may damage the body of yourvehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towingvehicles. Securely fasten thecable or chain to the towing hookprovided.

WARNINGUse extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continuethe towing. Contact an AuthorizedKia dealer or a commercial towtruck service for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

6 17


• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in themiddle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strapis not loosened during towing.

When your vehicle is being towedby another vehicle other than a towtruck (in case of an emergency)(2WD vehicles or part-time 4WDvehicles)• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Place the transfer shift knob for part-

time 4WD operation in the 2HI posi-tion.

• Release the parking bake.• Vehicle equipped with automatic trans-

missions should not exceed 45 km/h(28 mph) and should not be towedmore than 80 km (50 miles).

✽ NOTICERemove the rear drive shaft if it is nec-essary to exceed 45 km/h (28 mph)and/or 80 km (50 miles). If the driveshaft cannot be removed, stop every 80km (50 miles) and start the engine.Allow the engine to idle for a few min-utes. This will ensure that the transmis-sion is sufficiently lubricated.

E4BLA613


186

• Press the brake pedal with more forcethan normal since you will havereduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be requiredbecause the power steering systemwill be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, thebrakes may overheat and brake per-formance will be reduced. Stop oftenand let the brakes cool off.

✽ NOTICETo prevent internal damage to the trans-mission, never tow your vehicle from therear (backwards) with all four tires incontact with the surface.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud, sandor similar substances that prevent thevehicle from being driven out under itsown power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from

the front and the back of the tires.• Place a stone or wood under the tires.

6 19


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Storing the jack and tools Jack is stored in the compartment ofthe cargo area.Jack handle and wheel lug nutwrench are located in the cargo areafloor.

Removing the spare tire Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the cargoarea.1. Open the rear hatch.2. Assemble the wheel lug nut

wrench to the jack handle.

3. Insert the jack handle into the holejust above the rear bumper. Theresistance to turning will be feltwhen properly engaged.

4. Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise until the spare tirereaches the ground. Turn the jackhandle 10~13 revolutions counter-clockwise more after the spare tirereaches the ground, and draw thespare tire towards rear of vehicle.Never rotate the jack handle morethan 17 revolutions, otherwise thespare tire carrier may be dam-aged.

E2BLA614C E2BLA628 E2BLA615C


206

5. Remove the retainer from the cen-ter of the spare tire.

Storing the spare tire 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer through thewheel center.

3. Turn the handle clockwise until itclicks.

WARNING Hold the handle firmly and turnit slowly to lower the spare tire.The separation of the wrenchfrom the handle could causeloss of control and personalinjury.

E2BLA617A E2BLA624A

6 21


Important - use of compactspare tire (if equipped)your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

CAUTIONThis spare tire should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.


226

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash.

• This tire should not be installed onthe front axle if the vehicle must bedriven in snow or on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

Changing tires Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changingtires

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. If you cannotfind a firm, level place off theroad, call a towing servicecompany for assistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing seriousinjury or death. Never allowany portion of your body toget beneath the vehicle whileusing the jack.

• Do not start or run the enginewhile the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

6 23


Tire replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift into R (Reverse) with manual

transmission or P (Park) with auto-matic transmission.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

8BLA618 E2BLA619A

WARNING - Changingtires

To prevent vehicle movementswhile changing a tire, always setthe parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.


246

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing.

8. Securely tighten the valve of thejack. Move the jack handle up anddown until the top of the jack con-tacts the proper point and takes ona slight load.Raise the vehicle until the tire justclears the ground (approximately30 mm (1.2 in)). Never raise thewheel higher. Before removing thewheel lug nuts, make sure thevehicle is stable and that there isno chance for it to slip or move.

9. Remove the wheel lug nuts byturning them counterclockwise,then remove the wheel.

E2BLA620

JACK

E2BLC601 E2BLA621A

WARNING - Jack LocationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

6 25


10. Mount the spare tire into positionand install the wheel lug nutswith the beveled edge inward.

11. Gradually loosen the valve of thejack with the groove on the jackhandle to lower the vehicle.

12. Once the wheel lug nuts havebeen tightened, lower the vehiclefully to the ground and continueto tighten the lug nuts until theyare fully secured. Tighten thewheel lug nuts firmly in a “star”pattern.If you are unsure of the tightnessof the wheel lug nuts, have themchecked at the nearest servicestation. The specified tighteningtorque is 9~12 kg•m (88-118N•m, 65-87 ft•Ib).

E2BLA622 E2BLA621B

1

3

4 2

5

E2BLA623


266

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut, wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly. To storethe flat fire, refer to “Storing thespare

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Wheel StudsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a colli-sion.

WARNINGCheck the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

7

Maintenance services / 7-2

Maintenance schedule / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-7

Engine compartment / 7-10

Engine oil / 7-11

Engine cooling system / 7-12

Brake fluid / 7-14

Power steering / 7-15

Automatic transmission / 7-16

Lubricants and fluids / 7-18

Air cleaner / 7-19

Climate control air filter / 7-20

Wiper blades / 7-20

Battery / 7-22

Tires and wheels / 7-25

Lubricant specifications / 7-37

Exterior care / 7-39

Interior care / 7-42

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an Authorized Kia Dealer performthis work.An Authorized Kia Dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kiaparts to service your vehicle properly. Forexpert advice and quality service, see anAuthorized Kia Dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibil-ity.

You must retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Kia warranties.Detailed warranty information is providedin your Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual.

Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.

We strongly recommend that all vehiclemaintenance be performed by an author-ized Kia dealer using genuine Kia parts.

7 3

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Engine control system

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Replace every 160,000 km

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Drive belts (tension) I I I I

Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I

Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Fuel filter R R

Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses I I

Fuel tank air filter I R I R I

Air cleaner element (2) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Ignition wires I I

Spark plugs

PCV valve (if equipped) I I I I

Idle speed I I I I I

Valve clearance (1) I

Maintenance

47

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)Chassis and body

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Air conditioner compressor operation & I I I I I

refrigerant amount (if equipped)

Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I I I I I I I

Transfer case oil (if equipped) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Front differential fluid (if equipped) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Rear differential fluid (if equipped) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Front suspension ball joints I I I I

Brakes/clutch fluid (1) I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I R

Front brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Rear brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake lines & connections I I I I I

(including booster)

Manual transaxle oil (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

7 5

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Inspect when abnormal condition noted

Rotate the tires every 12,000 km

Chassis and body (Continued)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Automatic transaxle fluid (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Wheel alignment (4)

Tire rotation

Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid & lines I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft u-joints (SUV) L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I

Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

Maintenance

67

Chart Symbols:

I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust of replace.R- Replace or changeL- Lubricate.

(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.(3) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:

a. Short-distance drivingb. Driving on dusty roads.c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.

(4) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.

* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.

7 7

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an Authorized Kia Dealer atthe frequencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check forstrange sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transmission occurs,check the transmission fluid level.

• Check automatic transmission P (Park)function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure.This could cause burns orother serious injury.

Maintenance

87

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper bladeswith clean cloth dampened with wash-er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year :• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.• Check the air conditioning system

before the warm weather season.• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate automatic trans-

mission linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

7 9

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precautionsImproper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anAuthorized Kia Dealer with special tools.

✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance duringthe warranty period may affect warran-ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-rate Kia Warranty & ConsumerInformation Manual provided with thevehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-icing or maintenance procedure, have itdone by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured while per-forming some maintenance pro-cedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Working under the hood with theengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Always remove allloose or hanging clothing and alljewelry before working on theengine.

Maintenance

107

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OBL086001N

1. Air cleaner

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Auto transmission fluid dipstick*

5. Brake / clutch* fluid reservoir

6. Fuse box

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Power steering fluid reservoir

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine coolant reservoir

11. Battery

* : if equipped

1 43 5 62

7 8 9 1110

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

7 11

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level. The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Have engine oil and filter changed by anAuthorized Kia Dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

OBL076011N

Maintenance

127

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMThe high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with a mixture ofantifreeze and water. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an AuthorizedKia Dealer for a cooling system inspec-tion.

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and enginedamage and could result in seri-ous personal injury from escap-ing hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

OBL056001N

7 13

Maintenance

Changing coolantHave coolant changed by an AuthorizedKia Dealer according to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of this section.• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in

the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant and steammay blow out under pressure caus-ing serious injury.

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

OMG075006

Maintenance

147

BRAKE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically.The fluid level should be betweenMAX and MIN marks on the side of thereservoir.Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake fluid, clean the area aroundthe reservoir cap thoroughly to preventbrake fluid contamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake linings. Ifthe fluid level is excessively low, have thebrake system checked by an AuthorizedKia Dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Referto “Recommended Lubricants” later inthis section.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brakefluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan Authorized Kia Dealer.

OBL056008N

CAUTIONDo not allow brake fluid to contactthe vehicle's body paint, as paintdamage will result. Brake fluid,which has been exposed to open airfor an extended time should neverbe used as its quality cannot beguaranteed. It should be thrownout. Don't put in the wrong kind offluid. A few drops of mineral-basedoil, such as engine oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake systemparts.

7 15

Maintenance

POWER STEERING

Checking the power steering fluidlevel With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel.

In the event the power steering systemrequires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified power steeringfluid. (Refer to "RecommendedLubricants" later in this section.)

Power steering hoseCheck the connections for oil leaks,severe damage and the twists in thepower steering hose before driving.

OBL056007

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate thevehicle for prolonged periodswith a low power steering fluidlevel.

• Never start the engine when thereservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful thatdirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can make the steer-ing wheel heavier or strangenoise can be generated.

• The use of the non-specified fluidcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe power steering wheel andcause damage to it.

Maintenance

167

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the automatic transmis-sion fluid level The automatic transmission fluidlevel should be checked regularly.Keep the vehicle on the level ground withthe parking brake applied and check thefluid level according to the following pro-cedure.1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine is run-ning at idle speed.

2. After the transmission is warmed upsufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C(158~176°F), for example by 10 min-utes usual driving, shift the selectorlever through all positions then placethe selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P(Park)” position.

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”range on the level gauge. If the fluidlevel is lower, add the specified fluidfrom the fill hole. If the fluid level ishigher, drain the fluid from the drainhole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-dition (fluid temperature 20~30°C(68~86°F) add the fluid to “COLD” lineand then recheck the fluid levelaccording to the above step 2.

OBL056002

Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

25 C 75 C

E2BLA712A

LowHOT

COLD

Full

Low

Cold fluid scale

Hot fluid scale

Full

7 17

Maintenance

✽ NOTICE“COLD” scale is for reference only andshould NOT be used to determine trans-mission fluid level.

✽ NOTICENew automatic transmission fluidshould be red. The red dye is added sothe assembly plant can identify it asautomatic transmission fluid and distin-guish it from engine oil or antifreeze.The red dye, which is not an indicator offluid quality, is not permanent. As thevehicle is driven, the automatic trans-mission fluid will begin to look darker.The color may eventually appear lightbrown. Therefore, have an AuthorizedKia dealer change the automatic trans-mission fluid according to the ScheduledMaintenance at the beginning of thissection.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes transmis-

sion slippage. Overfilling cancause foaming, loss of fluid andtransmission malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluidcould result in transmission mal-function and failure.

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement of thevehicle, apply parking brake anddepress the brake pedal beforemoving the shift lever.

WARNING - Transmissionfluid

The transmission fluid level shouldbe checked when the engine is atnormal operating temperature. Thismeans that the engine, radiator,radiator hose and exhaust systemetc., are very hot. Exercise greatcare not to burn yourself during thisprocedure.

Maintenance

187

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that youcan check the level with a quick visualinspection.Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

This warning light indicatesthe washer fluid reservoir isnear empty. Refill the washerfluid as soon as possible.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, such asdoor hinges, hood hinges, and locks,should be lubricated each time theengine oil is changed. Use a non-freez-ing lubricant on locks during cold weath-er.Make sure the engine hood secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening whenthe primary latch is released.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield Washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor it's occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

6BLA713

7 19

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Element replacementHave the air cleaner element checkedand replaced in accordance with themaintenance schedule.

✽ NOTICEDo not drive with the air cleanerremoved; this will result in excessiveengine wear.

OBL076006N

CAUTION - EngineDriving without an air cleanerencourages backfiring, which couldcause a fire in the engine compart-ment.

Maintenance

207

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) are position is selected. If thishappens, have the climate control air fil-ter replaced by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

The air filter should be replaced every15,000 km (10,000 miles). If the vehicleis operated in the severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for a longperiod, it should be inspected more fre-quently and replaced earlier. When youtry to replace the air filter by owner main-tenance, replace it performing the follow-ing procedure, and in this case, be care-ful to avoid damaging other components.

Wiper blade maintenance Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

6BLA523

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Blower

Evaporator coreHeater core Climate control air filter

WIPER BLADES

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

7 21

Maintenance

Windshield wiper blade replace-mentWhen the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiperblade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield, since it maychip or crack the windshield.

1LDA5023

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiper armsor other components, do not attemptto move the wipers manually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

Maintenance

227

Rear window wiper blade replace-ment1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the center part (➀) into theslot (➁) in the wiper arm until it clicksinto place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by gently pulling on theblade.

1KMB7038 1KMB7039

➀➁

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

BATTERY

7 23

Maintenance

For best battery service :• Keep the battery securely mounted.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. Ifpossible, continue to applywater with a sponge orcloth until medical attentionis received.

If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feel apain or a burning sensation,get medical attention imme-diately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

E2BLA721

Maintenance

247

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

Items to be reset after the battery hasbeen discharged or the battery hasbeen disconnected.• Clock (See Chapter 3)• Trip computer (See Chapter 4)• Compass (See Chapter 4)• Climate control system (See Chapter 4)• Audio (See Chapter 3)

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, orflame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

CAUTION• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installed lastwhen the battery is disconnected.

7 25

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELSTires careFor proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Inflation pressures All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than 1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.(Refer to “Tires” in section 8,Specifications.)

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the front driver’s door sill.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa(10 psi) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor protracted periods at highspeeds.

E2BLD502A

Maintenance

267

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tire failure.This couldresult in loss of vehicle controland potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1.6 km (onemile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by anAuthorized Kia Dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6psi). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If thecap have been lost, install newone as soon as possible.

7 27

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tirealso if you can see fabric or cord.After rotation, be sure to bring thefront and rear tire pressures to spec-ification and check lug nut tightness.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

Maintenance

287

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern onlyfrom front to rear and not fromright to left.

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch ) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

WARNING• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stance. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

CBGQ0706

CBGQ0707

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

With a full-size spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

Tread wear indicator

2GHA5032

7 29

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replace-ment (if equipped)A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew Kia and should be mounted onthe same compact spare tire wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

Wheel alignment and tire balanceThe wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING - Replacingtires

• Driving on worn-out tires isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• Your vehicle is equipped withtires designed to provide forsafe ride and handling capa-bility. Do not use a size andtype of tire and wheel that isdifferent from the one that isoriginally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safetyand performance of your vehi-cle, which could lead to han-dling failure or rollover andserious injury. When replacingthe tires, be sure to equip allfour tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type,tread, brand and load-carryingcapacity.

(Continued)

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

307

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

Tire sidewall labelingFederal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of thetire and also provides the tire identifi-cation number (TIN) for safety stan-dard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of arecall.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance,snow chain clearance,speedometer calibration, head-light aim and bumper height.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

(Continued)If you nevertheless decide toequip your vehicle with anytire/wheel combination notrecommended by Kia for offroad driving, you should notuse these tires for highwaydriving.

• The use of any other tire sizeor type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, stopping distance, bodyto tire clearance, snow tireclearance, and speedometerreliability.

• It is best to replace all fourtires at the same time. If that isnot possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

7 31

Maintenance

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.

Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P245/70R16 106T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tires have this marking).

245 - Tire width in millimeters.

70 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).16 - Rim diameter in inches.106 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:7.0 JJX16

7.0 - Rim width in inches.JJ - Rim contour designation.16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tire size designa-tion on the sidewall of the tire. Thissymbol corresponds to that tire'sdesigned maximum safe operatingspeed.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

327

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years, basedon the manufacturing date, tirestrength and performance, declinewith age naturally (even unusedspare tires). Therefore, the tires(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2006.

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-bercoated fabric in the tire. Tire man-ufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remainingtread, it is recommended thattires generally be replaced aftersix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading condi-tions can accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in suddentire failure, which could lead to aloss of control and an accidentinvolving serious injury ordeath.

7 33

Maintenance

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading The following information relates tothe tire grading system developed bythe Canadian Motor VehicleStandard Safety (CMVSS) for grad-ing tires by tread wear, traction andtemperature performance.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on Kia vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.

Maintenance

347

Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tires todegenerate and reduce tires life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tires failure. Grades A and Brepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by the law.

Tire terminology and defini-tionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inkilopascal (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentires failure.This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

7 35

Maintenance

DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.

Maintenance

367

Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle.The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufactur-er, brand and or model name mold-ing that is higher or deeper than thesame moldings on the other sidewallof the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called “wearbars”, that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

7 37

Maintenance

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantrally reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4psi) more air pressure than the pres-sure recommended for the standardtires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar, or up to themaximum pressure shown on the tiresidewall whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Maintenance

387

LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONSRecommended lubricantsTo help achieve proper engine and pow-ertrain performance and durability, useonly lubricants of the proper quality. Thecorrect lubricants also help promoteengine efficiency that results in improvedfuel economy.Engine oils labeled Energy ConservingOil are now available. Along with otheradditional benefits, they contribute to fueleconomy by reducing the amount of fuelnecessary to overcome engine friction.Often, these improvements are difficult tomeasure in everyday driving, but in ayear’s time, they can offer significant costand energy savings.

*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 LSD : Limited Slip Differential

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Classification

API Service SJ, SL or above,

ILSAC GF-3 or above

Automatic transmission fluid APOLLOIL ATF RED-1K

4WD transfer case fluid DEXRON III (fill-for-life)

Front differential fluid API Service GL-5 (SAE 90)

Rear differential Without LSD *2 API Service GL-5 (SAE 90)

fluid With LSD *2 API Service GL-5 (SAE 85W-90, INFILREX 33)

Power steering fluid PSF-III

Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Engine oil *¹

7 39

Maintenance

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and cold weatheroperating (starting and oil flow). Lowerviscosity engine oils can provide betterfuel economy and cold weather perform-ance, however, higher viscosity engineoils are required for satisfactory lubrica-tion in hot weather. Using oils of any vis-cosity other than those recommendedcould result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider therange of temperature your vehicle will beoperated in before the next oil change.Proceed to select the recommended oilviscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

GasolineEngine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SJ,SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

CAUTIONAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug, ordipstick before checking or drain-ing any lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engineand other mechanisms that couldbe damaged.

Maintenance

407

EXTERIOR CARE Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

CAUTIONDo not use strong soap, chemicaldetergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlightor when the body of the vehicle iswarm. CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-partment including high pressurewater washing may cause the fail-ure of electrical circuits located inthe engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electri-cal/electronic components insidethe vehicle as this may damagethem.

OJB037800

7 41

Maintenance

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch thefinish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline orcaustic agents on chrome-platedor anodized aluminum parts. Thismay result in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause discol-oration or paint deterioration.

Maintenance

427

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month, after off-roaddriving and at the end of each winter. Payspecial attention to these areas becauseit is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it. Thelower edges of doors, rocker panels, andframe members have drain holes thatshould not be allowed to clog with dirt;trapped water in these areas can causerusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It maydamage and corrode the aluminumwheels coated with a clear protectivefinish.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

7 43

Maintenance

INTERIOR CARE Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions that follow forthe proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-rior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

To clean the leather upholstery (if equipped)In the normal course of use, leatherupholstered surfaces will, like any mate-rial, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust anddirt must be cleaned off or it may workinto the surface of the leather, causingdamage.

Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washingleather thoroughly with soap and waterwill keep your leather lustrous, beautifuland ensure you have many years ofwear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and usingany mild soap and lukewarm water, workup a good lather. Thoroughly wash theleather. Wipe clean with a slightly dampcloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this asoften as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oilsare incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life ofthe leather. Oil applied to the finishedsurface will in no way help the leatherand may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes shouldnever be used under any conditions.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquidsto come in contact withelectrical/electronic componentsinside the vehicle as this may dam-age them.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Maintenance

447

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbingClean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior windowglassIf the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow thedirections on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the insideof the rear window. This may resultin damage to the rear windowdefroster grid.

8

Specifications / 8-2

Specifications

Specifications

28

SPECIFICATIONSThe specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time of printing, Kiareserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for moreprecise and more up-to-date information.

Item mm (in)

Overall length 4,590 (180.7)

Overall width 1800(70.9 ) / 1885 (74.2)*1

Overall height 1725 (67.9) / 1805 (71.1)*2

Front tread 1580 (62.2)

Rear tread 1580 (62.2)

Wheelbase 2710 (106.7)

Dimensions Bulb wattage

*1 With side garnish *2 With roof rack

WeightsRefer to the compliance label describing GVWR & GAWRweights attached to your vehicle.(see page 5-39, Label information)

Light Bulb Wattage

Exterior Lights

Headlights (High/Low) 55 / 55

Front turn signal / position lights 28 / 8

Front fog lights 27

Front side marker 5

Rear turn signal lights 27

Stop and tail lights (if equipped) 27 / 8

Back-up lights 18

License plate lights 5

High mounted stop light 5

Rear side marker 5

Interior Lights

Room lamp 10

Map lamp 10

Rear cargo area lamp 10

Door courtesy lamp (if equipped) 5

Vanity mirror lamp 3

8 3

Specifications

Tires

P225/75R16 7.0JJ x 16 210 (30)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

P245/70R16 7.0JJ x 16 210 (30)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

P245/65R17 7.0JJ x 17 210 (30)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

T165/90R17 4.0T x 17 420 (60)9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

Full size tire

Compactspare tire

Wheel lug nut torque

kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)Inflation pressure

kPa (psi)Item Tire size Wheel size

Specifications

48

Capacities

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 7-38.*2 LSD : Limited Slip Differential

Lubricant Volume Classification

5.2 l (5.49 US qt.)

Automatic transmission fluid 10 l (10.57 US qt.) APOLLOIL ATF RED-1K4WD transfer case 1.42 l (1.50 US qt.) DEXRON III (fill for-life)

Power steering0.85~0.9 l

PSF-III(0.9~0.95 US qt.)

Front differential 1.3 l (1.37 US qt.) API SERVICE GL-5 (SAE 90)

Rear differential API SERVICE GL-5 (SAE 90)1.6 l (1.69 US qt.)

API SERVICE GL-5 (SAE 85W-90, INFILREX33)

Coolant 9.0 l (9.4 US qt.)Ethylene glycol base for

aluminum radiatorBrake fluid 0.35 l (0.37 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 80 l (21 US gal) -

Engine oil with filter *1

Without LSD *2

With LSD *2

API Service SJ, SL or above,ILSAC GF-3 or above

9Index

Index

29

Air bags - advanced supplemental restraint system ········································································3-47

Air cleaner ····································································7-19Antenna·········································································3-98Audio remote control···················································3-99Audio system ······························································3-100Auto fuel cutoff switch ················································3-74Automatic climate control system······························4-66Automatic transmission ········································4-5,7-16

Battery···········································································7-22Before driving·································································5-5Brake fluid····································································7-14Brake system ································································4-20

Climate control air filter ·············································7-20Cruise control system ··················································4-27

Defroster ·······································································4-57Door locks ·······································································3-7

Electrical circuit protection ··········································6-7Electronic stability control··········································4-30Emergency starting························································6-4Emission control system················································5-3Engine compartment·············································2-3,7-10Engine cooling system ·················································7-12Engine oil ······································································7-11Exterior care·································································7-39

Four wheel drive (4WD)··············································4-10Fuel filler lid ·································································3-71Fuel requirements ··························································5-2

Gauges···········································································4-37

Hazard warning flasher ··············································4-58Homelink® wireless control system ···························3-78Hood ··············································································3-69How to use this manual ·················································1-2

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

9 3

Index

If you have a flat tire ···················································6-19Ignition switch································································4-2Immobilizer system························································3-5Instrument cluster ·······················································4-36Instrument panel overview ···········································2-2Interior care··································································7-42Interior features ···························································3-86Interior lights ·······························································3-82

Keys ·················································································3-2

Label information ························································5-39Lighting·········································································4-51Limited slip differential···············································4-19Lubricant specifications ··············································7-37Lubricants and fluids ··················································7-18Luggage center box······················································3-96Luggage net ··································································3-94

Maintenance schedule Owner maintenance················7-7Maintenance services·····················································7-2Manual climate control system···································4-59Mirrors··········································································3-74

Multi-meter···································································4-45

Overheating ····································································6-3

Power steering ······························································7-15

Rear parking assist system··········································4-33Remote keyless entry ·····················································3-3Road warning ·································································6-2Roof rack ······································································3-96

Safety belts····································································3-25Seat ················································································3-15Special driving conditions ·············································5-7Specifications··································································8-2Starting the engine ·························································4-4Steering wheel·······························································4-25Storage compartment ··················································3-83Suggestions for economical operation··························5-6Sunroof··········································································3-91

K

L

M

I

O

P

R

S

Index

49

Tires and wheels···························································7-25Tonneau cover ······························································3-95Towing ···········································································6-14Trailer towing ·······························································5-31

Using four-wheel drive ················································5-11

Vehicle break-in process················································1-3Vehicle handling instructions········································1-3Vehicle load limit··························································5-25

Warnings and indicators ·············································4-39Weight of the vehicle ···················································5-29Window ·········································································3-13Windshield defrosting and defogging ························4-75Wiper blades·································································7-20Wipers and washers·····················································4-54

V

W

U

T

kia, the company - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of kia, the company - Dealer E Process